ABB REL650 series Скачать руководство пользователя | Manualshive

Страница: 407 / 856

background image

11.4.8.4

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.4.9

Operation principle

11.4.9.1

Switch controller SCSWI

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The
involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation,
blockings and synchronism-check.

Control handling

.

Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter

CtlModel

defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct

with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security"
command model requires a select before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step
ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence
is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence
is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute
belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850 communication. The last cause
L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent

is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution

command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of
the position value.

Evaluation of position

The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With the
group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality
attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.

1MRK 506 335-UUS A

Section 11

Control

401

Technical manual

«
...
405
406
407
408
409
...
»

Содержание REL650 series

Страница 1: ...Relion 650 series Line distance protection REL650 ANSI Technical manual ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...Document ID 1MRK 506 335 UUS Issued October 2016 Revision A Product version 1 3 Copyright 2013 ABB All rights reserved ...

Страница 4: ...SL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com and Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Warranty ...

Страница 5: ...product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons including but not limited to personal injuries or death shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be compl...

Страница 6: ...rning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC ...

Страница 7: ...g functions 45 Station communication 49 Basic IED functions 50 Section 3 Analog inputs 53 Introduction 53 Operation principle 53 Presumptions for technical data 54 Settings 55 Section 4 Binary input and output modules 63 Binary input 63 Binary input debounce filter 63 Oscillation filter 63 Settings 64 Setting parameters for binary input modules 64 Setting parameters for communication module 65 Sec...

Страница 8: ... 77 Keypad 77 LED 79 Functionality 79 Status LEDs 79 Indication LEDs 79 Function keys 88 Functionality 88 Operation principle 88 Section 6 Impedance protection 91 Five zone distance protection quadrilateral and mho characteristic ZQMPDIS 21 91 Identification 91 Functionality 21 91 Function block 92 Signals 92 Settings 93 Operation principle 98 General 98 Full scheme measurement 99 Quadrilateral ch...

Страница 9: ...perate currents 141 Simplified logic diagrams 142 Technical data 147 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment for mho FMPSPDIS 21 147 Identification 147 Functionality 147 Function block 148 Signals 148 Settings 149 Operation principle 149 The phase selection function 149 Technical data 160 Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults ZDARDIR 21D 160 Identificati...

Страница 10: ...nctionality 175 Function block 175 Signals 175 Settings 176 Operation principle 177 Resistive reach in forward direction 179 Resistive reach in reverse direction 179 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction 180 Basic detection logic 180 Operating and inhibit conditions 182 Technical data 183 Automatic switch onto fault logic voltage and current based ZCVPSOF 183 Identification 183 Functiona...

Страница 11: ...tings 192 Monitored Data 193 Principle of operation 193 Technical data 193 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3 phase output OC4PTOC 51 67 194 Identification 194 Functionality 194 Function block 195 Signals 195 Settings 196 Monitored data 198 Operation principle 198 Second harmonic blocking element 203 Technical data 204 Four step phase overcurrent protection phase segregated output OC4SPTOC 5...

Страница 12: ...unction 221 Internal polarizing 222 External polarizing for ground fault function 225 Base quantities within the protection 225 Internal ground fault protection structure 225 Four residual overcurrent steps 225 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function 226 Second harmonic blocking element 231 Technical data 232 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and po...

Страница 13: ...oad protection one time constant Fahrenheit Celsius LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 248 Identification 248 Functionality 249 Function block 249 Signals 250 Settings 251 Monitored data 252 Operation principle 253 Technical data 256 Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output CCRBRF 50BF 256 Identification 256 Functionality 256 Function block 257 Signals 257 Settings 258 Monitored data 259 Operation p...

Страница 14: ...1 Signals 272 Settings 272 Monitored data 273 Operation principle 273 Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker 274 Unsymmetrical current detection 275 Technical data 275 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 46 275 Identification 275 Functionality 276 Function block 276 Signals 276 Settings 276 Monitored data 277 Operation principle 277 Technical data 278 Directional over under power protection GO...

Страница 15: ...88 Function block 289 Signals 289 Settings 290 Monitored data 291 Operation principle 291 Technical data 291 Section 8 Voltage protection 293 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27 293 Identification 293 Functionality 293 Function block 293 Signals 294 Settings 294 Monitored data 295 Operation principle 295 Measurement principle 296 Time delay 296 Blocking 297 Design 298 Technical data 299 Tw...

Страница 16: ...09 Operation principle 309 Measurement principle 310 Time delay 310 Blocking 310 Design 310 Technical data 312 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 27 312 Identification 312 Functionality 312 Function block 313 Signals 313 Settings 313 Operation principle 314 Technical data 316 Section 9 Frequency protection 317 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81 317 Identification 317 Functionality 317 Function block 3...

Страница 17: ...l data 325 Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 325 Identification 325 Functionality 325 Function block 326 Signals 326 Settings 326 Operation principle 327 Measurement principle 327 Time delay 327 Design 328 Technical data 328 Section 10 Secondary system supervision 329 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF 87 329 Identification 329 Functionality 329 Function block 329 Signals 330 Settings...

Страница 18: ...ettings 345 Operation principle 345 Technical data 346 Section 11 Control 347 Synchronism check energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 25 347 Identification 347 Functionality 347 Function block 348 Signals 348 Settings 350 Monitored data 352 Operation principle 353 Basic functionality 353 Synchronism check 353 Synchronizing 355 Energizing check 357 Fuse failure supervision 357 Voltage selectio...

Страница 19: ...tings 378 Operation principle 379 Auto reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled 379 Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle 379 Auto reclosing mode selection 381 Control of the auto reclosing open time for shot 1 382 Long trip signal 382 Reclosing checks and the reset timer 383 Pulsing of the CB closing command 384 Transient fault 385 Permanent fault and reclosin...

Страница 20: ...ignals 397 Settings 397 Local remote control LOCREMCTRL 398 Identification 398 Functionality 398 Function block 398 Signals 398 Settings 399 Select release SELGGIO 399 Identification 399 Function block 400 Signals 400 Settings 401 Operation principle 401 Switch controller SCSWI 401 Bay control QCBAY 405 Local remote Local remote control LOCREM LOCREMCTRL 407 Interlocking 408 Functionality 408 Logi...

Страница 21: ...415 Settings 417 Interlocking for bus section disconnector A1A2_DC 3 417 Identification 417 Functionality 417 Function block 418 Logic diagram 418 Signals 419 Settings 420 Interlocking for bus coupler bay ABC_BC 3 420 Identification 420 Functionality 420 Function block 422 Logic diagram 423 Signals 425 Settings 428 Interlocking for breaker and a half diameter BH 3 428 Identification 428 Functional...

Страница 22: ...Function block 466 Logic diagram 467 Signals 469 Settings 471 Position evaluation POS_EVAL 471 Identification 471 Functionality 471 Function block 471 Logic diagram 471 Signals 472 Settings 472 Operation principle 472 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO 475 Identification 475 Functionality 476 Function block 476 Signals 476 Settings 478 Monitored data 478 Oper...

Страница 23: ...tings 484 Operation principle 485 Automation bits AUTOBITS 485 Identification 485 Functionality 485 Function block 486 Signals 486 Settings 487 Operation principle 488 Function commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103CMD 488 Functionality 488 Function block 488 Signals 489 Settings 489 IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IEDCMD 489 Functionality 489 Function block 489 Signals 490 Settings 490 Function c...

Страница 24: ...ction block 495 Signals 496 Settings 497 Operation principle 497 Blocking scheme 498 Delta blocking scheme 498 Permissive underreaching scheme 499 Permissive overreaching scheme 500 Unblocking scheme 500 Intertrip scheme 501 Technical data 502 Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3 phase ZCRWPSCH 85 502 Identification 502 Functionality 502 Function block 503 Signals 503 Settings ...

Страница 25: ...cal data 516 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH 85 516 Identification 516 Functionality 517 Function block 517 Signals 517 Settings 518 Operation principle 519 Blocking scheme 519 Permissive under overreaching scheme 520 Unblocking scheme 521 Technical data 522 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH 85 523 Identifi...

Страница 26: ...Operation principle 534 Technical data 537 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO 537 Identification 537 Functionality 537 Function block 538 Signals 538 Settings 540 Operation principle 540 Configurable logic blocks 541 Standard configurable logic blocks 541 Functionality 541 OR function block 544 Inverter function block INVERTER 545 PULSETIMER function block 546 Controllable gate function block GATE 547 Excl...

Страница 27: ...inciple 559 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI 560 Identification 560 Functionality 560 Function block 561 Signals 561 Settings 562 Monitored data 562 Operation principle 562 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A 563 Identification 563 Functionality 563 Function block 564 Signals 564 Settings 565 Operation principle 565 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with l...

Страница 28: ...nality 575 Measurements CVMMXN 576 Identification 576 Function block 577 Signals 577 Settings 578 Monitored data 581 Phase current measurement CMMXU 582 Identification 582 Function block 582 Signals 582 Settings 583 Monitored data 584 Phase phase voltage measurement VMMXU 584 Identification 584 Function block 584 Signals 585 Settings 586 Monitored data 586 Current sequence component measurement CM...

Страница 29: ...XU 604 Phase phase and phase neutral voltage measurements VMMXU VNMMXU 605 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI 605 Technical data 605 Event Counter CNTGGIO 606 Identification 606 Functionality 606 Function block 606 Signals 607 Settings 607 Monitored data 607 Operation principle 608 Reporting 608 Technical data 608 Function description 609 Limit counter L4UFCNT 609 Introduction 6...

Страница 30: ...ion 624 Function block 624 Signals 625 Settings 625 Binary input signals BxRBDR 629 Identification 629 Function block 629 Signals 630 Settings 630 Operation principle 636 Disturbance information 638 Indications 638 Event recorder 638 Sequential of events 638 Trip value recorder 639 Disturbance recorder 639 Fault locator 639 Time tagging 639 Recording times 639 Analog signals 640 Binary signals 642...

Страница 31: ...8 Input signals 648 Operation principle 648 Technical data 649 Trip value recorder 649 Functionality 649 Function block 649 Signals 650 Input signals 650 Operation principle 650 Technical data 650 Disturbance recorder 651 Functionality 651 Function block 651 Signals 651 Settings 651 Operation principle 651 Memory and storage 652 Technical data 654 IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions SPGG...

Страница 32: ...660 Operation principle 660 Measured value expander block MVEXP 660 Identification 660 Functionality 660 Function block 661 Signals 661 Settings 661 Operation principle 661 Fault locator LMBRFLO 662 Identification 662 Functionality 662 Function block 663 Signals 663 Settings 664 Monitored data 665 Operation principle 665 Measuring Principle 666 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fau...

Страница 33: ... 678 Function block 678 Signals 678 Settings 679 Operation principle 680 Technical data 680 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 680 Identification 680 Functionality 681 Function block 681 Signals 682 Settings 683 Monitored data 684 Operation principle 684 Circuit breaker status 685 Circuit breaker operation monitoring 686 Breaker contact travel time 687 Operation counter 689 Accumulation of...

Страница 34: ...IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 699 Functionality 699 Function block 700 Signals 700 Settings 700 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 700 Functionality 700 Function block 701 Signals 701 Settings 702 IED status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IED 703 Functionality 703 Function block 703 Signals 703 Settings 703 Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103SUPERV 704 Functionality 704 Func...

Страница 35: ...red data 714 Operation principle 714 Technical data 715 Section 16 Station communication 717 DNP3 protocol 717 IEC 61850 8 1 communication protocol 717 Identification 717 Functionality 717 Communication interfaces and protocols 718 Settings 719 Technical data 719 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 719 Identification 719 Function block 720 Signals 720 Settings 722 Goose binary rece...

Страница 36: ...entification 729 Functionality 729 Function block 729 Signals 729 Settings 730 Operation principle 730 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV730 Identification 730 Functionality 731 Function block 731 Signals 731 Settings 731 Operation principle 731 IEC 60870 5 103 communication protocol 732 Functionality 732 Settings 733 IEC 61850 8 1 redundant station bus communication 7...

Страница 37: ...ist SELFSUPEVLST 740 Identification 740 Settings 740 Operation principle 740 Internal signals 743 Run time model 744 Technical data 745 Time synchronization 746 Functionality 746 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN 746 Identification 746 Settings 746 Time synchronization via SNTP 746 Identification 746 Settings 747 Time system summer time begin DSTBEGIN 747 Identification 747 Settings 748 Time syste...

Страница 38: ... Function block 755 Signals 756 Settings 756 Operation principle 756 Test mode functionality TESTMODE 757 Identification 757 Functionality 758 Function block 758 Signals 758 Settings 759 Operation principle 759 Change lock function CHNGLCK 760 Identification 760 Functionality 760 Function block 761 Signals 761 Settings 761 Operation principle 761 IED identifiers TERMINALID 762 Identification 762 F...

Страница 39: ... Operation principle 774 Global base values GBASVAL 774 Identification 775 Functionality 775 Settings 775 Authority check ATHCHCK 775 Identification 775 Functionality 776 Settings 776 Operation principle 777 Authorization handling in the IED 777 Authority management AUTHMAN 778 Identification 778 AUTHMAN 778 Settings 779 FTP access with password FTPACCS 779 Identification 779 FTP access with SSL F...

Страница 40: ...al connections 787 Protective ground connections 787 Inputs 788 Measuring inputs 788 Auxiliary supply voltage input 789 Binary inputs 789 Outputs 793 Outputs for tripping controlling and signalling 793 Outputs for signalling 795 IRF 797 Communication connections 798 Ethernet RJ 45 front connection 798 Station communication rear connection 799 Optical serial rear connection 799 EIA 485 serial rear ...

Страница 41: ...s and tests 806 Section 20 IED and functionality tests 807 Electromagnetic compatibility tests 807 Insulation tests 809 Mechanical tests 809 Product safety 810 EMC compliance 810 Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 811 Application 811 Operation principle 814 Mode of operation 814 Inverse time characteristics 817 Section 22 Glossary 841 Table of contents 35 Technical manual ...

Страница 42: ...36 ...

Страница 43: ... during normal service 1 2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs The installat...

Страница 44: ... The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 and DNP 3 0 The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED The manual provides procedures ...

Страница 45: ...can also provides assistance for calculating settings The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks logic diagrams input and output signals setting parameters and technical data sorted per function The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase installation and commissioning phase and during normal service The commu...

Страница 46: ...BUS MICS 1MRG 010 656 PICS 1MRG 010 660 PIXIT 1MRG 010 658 1 4 Symbols and conventions 1 4 1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text It...

Страница 47: ...ate between the options use and HMI menu paths are presented in bold For example select Main menu Settings LHMI messages are shown in Courier font For example to save the changes in non volatile memory select Yes and press Parameter names are shown in italics For example the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting Each function block symbol shows the available input output ...

Страница 48: ...42 ...

Страница 49: ... directional function for earth faults 1 1 1 1 ZDNRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral and mho 1 1 1 1 PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0 1 1 1 1 ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0 1 1 1 1 ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic voltage and current based 1 1 1 1 2 2 Back up protection functions IEC 61850 or Function name ANSI Function description Line Distance REL650 REL650 A01A 3Ph 1CB REL...

Страница 50: ...heit 0 1 1 1 1 CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output 0 2 1 2 CSPRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection phase segregated activation and output 0 1 1 STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0 1 1 1 1 CCRPLD 52PD Pole discordance protection 0 2 1 1 2 BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0 1 1 1 1 GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0 1 1 1 1 GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower p...

Страница 51: ...IEDCMD IED commands for IEC60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC60870 5 103 4 4 4 4 I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC60870 5 103 50 50 50 50 I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC60870 5 103 50 50 50 50 Apparatus control and Interlocking APC8 Apparatus control for single bay max 8 app 1CB incl interlocking 0 1 SCILO 3 Logical node for in...

Страница 52: ... Logic SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic common 3 phase output 1 2 1 2 SPTPTRC 94 Tripping logic phase segregated output 1 1 TMAGGIO Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 OR Configurable logic blocks 283 283 283 283 INVERTER Configurable logic blocks 140 140 140 140 PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40 GATE Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40 XOR Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40 LOOPDELAY Confi...

Страница 53: ...representation 16 16 16 16 TEIGGIO Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision 12 12 12 12 Monitoring CVMMXN Measurements 6 6 6 6 CMMXU Phase current measurement 10 10 10 10 VMMXU Phase phase voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 CMSQI Current sequence component measurement 6 6 6 6 VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6 VNMMXU Phase neutral voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 AISVB...

Страница 54: ...SIMG 63 Insulation gas monitoring function 0 2 1 1 2 SSIML 71 Insulation liquid monitoring function 0 2 1 1 2 SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0 2 1 1 2 I103MEAS Measurands for IEC60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC60870 5 103 3 3 3 3 I103AR Function status auto recloser for IEC60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103EF Function status ground fault for IEC60870 5 103 ...

Страница 55: ...on protocol 1 1 1 1 MST2TCP DNP3 0 for TCP IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 MST3TCP DNP3 0 for TCP IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 MST4TCP DNP3 0 for TCP IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 OPTICALPROT Operation selection for optical serial 1 1 1 1 RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1 DNPFREC DNP3 0 fault records for TCP IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 OPTICAL1...

Страница 56: ...on ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit 0 1 1 1 1 ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3 phase 0 1 1 1 ZCWSPSCH 85 Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection phase segregated 0 1 1 ZCLCPLAL Local acceleration logic 1 1 1 1 ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection 0 1 1 1 1 ECR...

Страница 57: ...es 1 SMAI_20_1 SMAI_20_12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 2 3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 12 GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6 ATHSTAT Authority status 1 ATHCHCK Authority check 1 AUTHMAN Authority management 1 FTPACCS FTPS access with password 1 DOSFRNT Denial of service frame rate control for front port 1 DOSLAN1 Denial of service frame rate control for LAN1A and LAN1B ports 1 DOSSCKT D...

Страница 58: ...52 ...

Страница 59: ...AngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading 3 2 Operation principle The direction of a current depends ...

Страница 60: ...ng to the plant condition then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object The settings of the IED is performed in primary values The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED wi...

Страница 61: ...TRM Channel 5 TRM Channel 6 TRM Channel 7 TRM Channel 8 TRM Channel 9 TRM Channel 10 AIM Channel 1 AIM Channel 2 AIM Channel 3 AIM Channel 4 AIM Channel 5 AIM Channel 6 AIM Channel 7 AIM Channel 8 AIM Channel 9 AIM Channel 10 TRM Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle presentation Table 2 TRM_6I_4U Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CTStarPoint1 FromObjec...

Страница 62: ...ed VT secondary voltage VTprim7 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec8 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim8 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec9 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage ...

Страница 63: ...rrent CTStarPoint8 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec8 0 1 10 0 A 0 1 1 0 Rated CT secondary current CTprim8 1 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current VTsec9 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage V...

Страница 64: ...0 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim10 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage Table 5 TRM_4I_6U Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CTStarPoint1 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObje...

Страница 65: ...ect ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec1 0 1 10 0 A 0 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 0 1 10 0 A 0 1 1 0 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint3 FromObject T...

Страница 66: ...t ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 0 1 10 0 A 0 1 1 0 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint3 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec3 0 1 10 0 A 0 1 1 0 Rated CT secondary current CTprim3 1 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint4 FromObject T...

Страница 67: ... 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim10 0 001 9999 999 kV 0 001 132 000 Rated VT primary voltage 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 3 Analog inputs 61 Technical manual ...

Страница 68: ...62 ...

Страница 69: ...hould be set to the same value for all channels on the board 4 1 2 Oscillation filter Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for example nearby breakers Floating input lines can result in disturbances to binary inputs These disturbances are unwanted in the system An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a bi...

Страница 70: ...time for input 2 OscillationCount2 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2 OscillationTime2 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 0 000 Oscillation time for input 2 Threshold3 6 900 VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery voltage for input 3 DebounceTime3 0 000 0 100 s 0 001 0 005 Debounce time for input 3 OscillationCount3 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3 OscillationTime3 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 ...

Страница 71: ...entage of station battery voltage for input 9 DebounceTime9 0 000 0 100 s 0 001 0 005 Debounce time for input 9 OscillationCount9 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9 OscillationTime9 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 0 000 Oscillation time for input 9 4 1 3 2 Setting parameters for communication module Table 10 COM05_12BI Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description BatteryVolt...

Страница 72: ...00 s 0 001 0 005 Debounce time for input 6 OscillationCount6 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6 OscillationTime6 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 0 000 Oscillation time for input 6 Threshold7 6 900 VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery voltage for input 7 DebounceTime7 0 000 0 100 s 0 001 0 005 Debounce time for input 7 OscillationCount7 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7 OscillationTi...

Страница 73: ...ime for input 11 OscillationCount11 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 11 OscillationTime11 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 0 000 Oscillation time for input 11 Threshold12 6 900 VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery voltage for input 12 DebounceTime12 0 000 0 100 s 0 001 0 005 Debounce time for input 12 OscillationCount12 0 255 1 0 Oscillation count for input 12 OscillationTime12 0 000 600 0...

Страница 74: ...68 ...

Страница 75: ... DefaultScreen 0 0 1 0 Default screen EvListSrtOrder Latest on top Oldest on top Latest on top Sort order of event list AutoIndicationDRP Disabled Enabled Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report SubstIndSLD No Yes No Substitute indication on single line diagram InterlockIndSLD No Yes No Interlock indication on single line diagram BypassCommands No Yes No Enable bypass of commands 5 2 L...

Страница 76: ...e 14 LHMICTRL Output signals Name Type Description HMI ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active RED S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is flashing CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are cleared LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are...

Страница 77: ...NEWIND ACK IEC09000321 1 en vsd IEC09000321 V1 EN Figure 4 LEDGEN function block GRP1_LED1 HM1L01R HM1L01Y HM1L01G IEC09000322 V1 EN Figure 5 GRP1_LED1 function block The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example all 15 LED in each of group 1 3 has a similar function block 5 3 3 Signals Table 15 LEDGEN Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LED...

Страница 78: ... Off On tRestart 0 0 100 0 s 0 1 0 0 Defines the disturbance length tMax 0 0 100 0 s 0 1 0 0 Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Table 19 GRP1_LED1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SequenceType Follow S Follow F LatchedAck F S LatchedAck S F LatchedColl S LatchedReset S Follow S Sequence type for LED 1 local HMI alarm group 1 LabelOff 0 18 1 G1L...

Страница 79: ...3 Signals Table 20 FNKEYMD1 Input signals Name Type Default Description LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key Table 21 FNKEYMD1 Output signals Name Type Description FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key 5 4 4 Settings Table 22 FNKEYMD1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Mode Off Toggle Pulsed Off Output operation mode PulseTime 0 00...

Страница 80: ...Local human machine interface The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements Display LCD Buttons LED indicators Communication port for PCM600 The LHMI is used for setting monitoring and controlling 5 5 1 1 Display The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels The character size can vary The display view is divided into four basic areas Section 5 1MRK 5...

Страница 81: ...a shows the menu content The status area shows the current IED time the user that is currently logged in and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600 If text pictures or other items do not fit in the display a vertical scroll bar appears on the right The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display horizontally Truncat...

Страница 82: ...ns Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function button control action The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600 ANSI12000025 1 en vsd ANSI12000025 V1 EN Figure 10 Function button panel The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs Three alarm LED pages are available Section 5 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Local ...

Страница 83: ... alarm texts related to each three color LED are divided into three pages There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available The 15 physical three color LEDs in one LED group can indicate 45 different signals Altogether 135 signals can be indicated since there are three LED groups The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600 There are two addition...

Страница 84: ...nd command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 1 5 Function button 6 Close 7 Open 8 Escape 9 Left 10 Down 11 Up 12 Right 13 User Log on 14 Enter 15 Remote Local 16 Uplink LED 17 Ethernet communication port RJ 45 18 Multipage 19 Menu 20 Clear 21 Help 22 Programmable alarm LEDs 23 Protection status LEDs Section 5 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 78 Technical manual ...

Страница 85: ...ed function that present the healthy status of the IED The yellow and red LEDs are user configured The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is triggered steady or that the IED is in test mode flashing The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function DRPRDRE by connecting a start or trip sig...

Страница 86: ...y be performed for indications defined for re starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 LatchedReset S When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light Operating sequence The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely For the Latched type each LED latches to...

Страница 87: ...nal LED IEC01000228_2_en vsd IEC01000228 V2 EN Figure 14 Operating Sequence 1 Follow S If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as described above An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is shown in Figure 15 Activating signal GREEN LED IEC09000312_1_en vsd G R G G Activating signal RED IEC09000312 V1 EN Figure 15 Operati...

Страница 88: ...be acknowledged independent of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment In Figure 17 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets Activating signal RED LED Acknow IEC09000313_1_en v...

Страница 89: ... RED LED Acknow IEC09000315 1 en vsd Activating signal YELLOW G G R R Y Activating signal GREEN IEC09000315 V1 EN Figure 19 Operating sequence 3 three colors involved alternative 2 Sequence 4 LatchedAck S F This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3 but steady and flashing light have been alternated Sequence 5 LatchedColl S This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting m...

Страница 90: ...LED will change color according to Figure 21 Activating signal RED LED Reset IEC09000316_1_en vsd Activating signal GREEN R G IEC09000316 V1 EN Figure 21 Operating sequence 5 two colors Sequence 6 LatchedReset S In this mode all activated LEDs which are set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset S are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6 La...

Страница 91: ...bance IEC01000239_2 en vsd Activating signal 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart IEC01000239 V2 EN Figure 22 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 85 Technical ma...

Страница 92: ... Disturbance tRestart IEC01000240 V2 EN Figure 23 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two different disturbances Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed Section 5 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 86 Technical manual ...

Страница 93: ...Disturbance tRestart IEC01000241 V2 EN Figure 24 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 87 Technical manual ...

Страница 94: ...d in the application configuration When used as a menu shortcut a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default nodes in the menu tree When used as a control the button can control a binary signal 5 5 3 2 Operation principle Each output on the FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI function keys By pressing a function button on the LHMI the output statu...

Страница 95: ... written the input has completed a pulse Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below Input value Output value IEC09000331_1_en vsd IEC09000331 V1 EN Figure 27 Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE Setting PULSED In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time After this time th...

Страница 96: ...function button LED when high This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8 since they are tri color they can be red yellow or green Each of these LEDs are controlled by three inputs which are prioritized in the following order Red Yellow Green INPUT OUTPUT RED YELLOW GREEN Functio...

Страница 97: ... fast distance protection ZQMPDIS 21 is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to ground faults for each of the independent zones Individual settings of characteristics and for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of d...

Страница 98: ... phase group signal for voltage UPOL GROUP SIGNAL Polarizing voltage for Mho BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all operate output signals BLKPG BOOLEAN 0 Block phase to ground loop operation BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Block phase to phase loop operation BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to Fuse Fail EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start signal to start the zone timers DIRCND INTEGER 0 Start direction ...

Страница 99: ...5_PU BOOLEAN Start signal Zone5 6 1 5 Settings Table 26 ZQMPDIS 21 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation CvtFltr Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable CVT Filtering LineAng 0 00 90 00 Deg 0 01 80 00 Line impedance angle in degrees common for all zones KNMag 0 000 3 000 0 001 0 000 Common ground compensation facto...

Страница 100: ...ohm loop Ph E Zone 1 RFPP1 0 005 3000 000 ohm l 0 001 30 000 Fault resistance reach in ohm loop Ph ph Zone 1 TimerSelZ1 Timers seperated Timers linked Internal start Start from PhSel External start Timers seperated Timer selection Zone 1 OpModetPEZ1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable time delay to operate phase to ground for Zone 1 tPEZ1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay to operate of phase to g...

Страница 101: ...to phase for Zone 2 tPPZ2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay to operate of phase to phase for Zone 2 CharPEZ3 Disabled Mho Quadrilateral Combined Disabled Characteristic selection for phase to ground Zone 3 CharPPZ3 Disabled Mho Quadrilateral Combined Disabled Characteristic selection for phase to phase Zone 3 DirModeZ3 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Disabled Direction setting for Zon...

Страница 102: ... 3000 000 ohm p 0 001 30 000 Forward reach setting for Zone 4 Z4Rev 0 005 3000 000 ohm p 0 001 30 000 Reverse reach setting for Zone 4 RFPE4 0 005 3000 000 ohm l 0 001 30 000 Fault resistance reach in ohm loop Ph E Zone 4 RFPP4 0 005 3000 000 ohm l 0 001 30 000 Fault resistance reach in ohm loop Ph ph Zone 4 TimerSelZ4 Timers seperated Timers linked Internal start Start from PhSel External start T...

Страница 103: ...er selection Zone 5 OpModetPEZ5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable time delay to operate phase to ground for Zone 5 tPEZ5 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay to operate of phase to ground for Zone 5 OpModetPPZ5 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable time delay to operate phase to phase for Zone 5 tPPZ5 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay to operate of phase to phase for Zone 5 Table 27 ZQMPDIS 21 Grou...

Страница 104: ... 6 Operation principle 6 1 6 1 General Five zone distance protection quadrilateral and mho characteristic ZQMPDIS 21 function is designed to operate in the following characteristic modes for separate phase to ground and phase to phase loops Mho characteristic Quadrilateral characteristic Combined Mho and Quadrilateral characteristic The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as show...

Страница 105: ...measurement The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type which means that each fault loop for phase to ground faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel Figure 31 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the five impedance measuring zones 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 6 Impedance protection 99 Technical...

Страница 106: ...zone performs like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements 6 1 6 3 Quadrilateral characteristic ZQMPDIS 21 basically implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the five zones separately Set CharPGZx or CharPPZx setting to Quadrilateral to choose particular measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection The quadrilateral characteristic ...

Страница 107: ...1 3 5 4 4 6 6 7 7 IEC09000308 V2 EN Figure 32 Characteristic for phase to ground measuring 1 RFPG 2 KNMag Z where KN Z ZN 3 Z where Z denotes the positive sequence vector corresponding to the zone reach 4 LineAng 5 KNAng negative 6 R1 Rn where Rn R0 R1 3 7 X1 Xn where Xn X0 X1 3 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 6 Impedance protection 101 Technical manual ...

Страница 108: ...easuring 1 0 5 RFPP 2 Z1 3 LineAng 4 R1 5 X1 The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type is presented as in figure 34 Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the fault resistive reach for phase to phase faults and three phase faults Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 102 Technical manual ...

Страница 109: ... 1 5 depending on selected zone are the eventual fault resistances in the faulty place Regarding the illustration of three phase fault in figure 34 there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three phase fault The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement which is made phase to phase The zone needs to be set to operate in Non directional Forward or Reverse dir...

Страница 110: ... R X R X R X Non directional Forward Reverse IEC05000182 V1 EN Figure 35 Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones Theory of operation The quadrilateral characteristic is implemented with reach characteristic and blinder characteristic Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 104 Technical manual ...

Страница 111: ...orward and reverse voltages are done in this VKRforward V I IN KN LineAng Zx GUID 3EF66E0D E9A4 48F2 8695 85858AAC343D V1 EN Equation 1 VKRreverse V I IN KN LineAng ZxRev GUID CA0875B7 C09B 4560 9246 BA8496EBE21E V1 EN Equation 2 where I is the measurement loop current For example in phase to ground loop I IA and for phase to phase loop I IBC V is the measurement loop voltage For example in phase ...

Страница 112: ...ANSI11000266_1_en vsd ANSI11000266 V1 EN Figure 37 Reach characteristic part of quadrilateral characteristic In figure 37only forward characteristic is shown Similarly reverse characteristic is also possible with VKRreverse In phase to ground loops along with the above comparison one more additional criterion is also checked with IRef I IN 1 5 for ground load compensation 0 arg IRef arg VKRForward...

Страница 113: ...ment loop current For example in phase to ground loop I IA and for phase to phase loop I IBC V is the measurement loop voltage For example in phase to ground loop V VA and for phase to phase loop V VBC Based on these voltages the blinder characteristic is implemented with Sine comparator TRUE if Im S1 Re S2 Im S2 Re S1 0 for following comparisons 0 arg VBR arg I pi 2 180 or 0 arg I pi 2 arg VAR 18...

Страница 114: ...tion 12 6 1 6 4 Mho characteristic ZQMPDIS 21 basically implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the five zones separately Set CharPGZx or CharPPZx setting to Mho to choose particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho distance protection Each distance protection zone can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic alternativel...

Страница 115: ... voltages This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults However if the source impedance is high the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions Basic operation characteristics In ZQMPDIS 21 each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic by setti...

Страница 116: ...ed signal to the input DIRCND The zone reach for phase to ground fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in polar coordinates IEC11000254_1_en vsd DirModeZx no dir MhoCharZx Directional offset R X DirModeZx Forward MhoCharZx Directional R X DirModeZx Reverse MhoCharZx Directional Zx ZxRev R X Zx ZxRev R X Zx ZxRev DirModeZx Forward MhoCharZx offset R X Zx ZxRev DirModeZx Reverse MhoChar...

Страница 117: ...e timers OpModetPGZx and OpModetPPZx where x is 1 5 depending on selected zone has to be set to Enabled This is also the case for instantaneous operation Theory of operation The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a polarizing phasor When the operating phasor leads the polarizing phasor by more than 90 degrees the function operates and gives a trip output Phase...

Страница 118: ...zed voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle for close in faults Operation occurs if 90 β 270 Z IAB AB comp V V ß IAB X IAB R Z IAB AB V pol V ANSI09000116 1 en vsd ANSI09000116 V1 EN Figure 41 Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A to B fault Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting parameters Z and ZRev T...

Страница 119: ...I Z v AB AB Re EQUATION1792 ANSI 650 V1 EN Equation 16 where V EQUATION1801 V1 EN is the VAB voltage ZRev is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in reverse direction ß V ANSI09000117 1 en vsd IAB X IAB Z AB Vcomp1 V IAB Z Vcomp2 V IF ZF VAB IAB R IAB ZRev ANSI09000117 V1 EN Figure 42 Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A to B fault Operat...

Страница 120: ...alculated according to equation 16 The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND See Directional impedance quadrilateral and mho ZDNRDIR for information about the mho directional element VAB ArgDir ArgNegRes Z ANSI09000118 1 en vsd IAB IABjX ANSI09000118 V1 EN Figure 43 Simplified offset mho c...

Страница 121: ...onventional way The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the ground return path For a ground fault in phase A the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived as shown in figure 45 A loop pol Vcomp V I Z EQUATION1793 ANSI V1 EN Equation 17 where Vpol is the polarizing voltage memorized VA for Phase A to ground fault Zloop is the loop impedance which in general terms can b...

Страница 122: ...1 EN Equation 19 where VA is the phase voltage in faulty phase A IA is the phase current in faulty phase A IN is the zero sequence current in faulty phase A 3I0 KN EQUATION1593 V1 EN Z0 Z1 3 Z1 EQUATION1594 V1 EN the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the magnitude KNMag and the angle KNAng Vpol is the 100 of positive sequence memorized voltage VA Section 6 1MRK 506...

Страница 123: ...pedance in forward reverse direction respectively The vector Z in the impedance plane has the settable angle LineAng and the angle for ZRev is LineAng 180 The condition for operation at phase to ground fault is that the angle β between the two compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 46 The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle The ang...

Страница 124: ... the basic criteria for offset mho according to equation 22 and 90 β 270 also the criteria that the angle φ between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant See figure 47 Operation occurs if 90 β 270 and ArgDir φ ArgNegRes where ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element ZDNRDIR ArgNegRes is the ...

Страница 125: ...xtra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes 180 see figure 48 The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for A to ground fault is 90 β 270 and 180 Argdir φ ArgNegRes 180 Th...

Страница 126: ... IA IB or IC IMinOpPG IA IB or IC is the RMS value of the current in phase IA IB or IC The phase to phase loop AB BC or CA is blocked if IAB BC or CA IMinOpPP The current limits IMinOpPG and IMInOpPP are automatically reduced to 75 of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction that is DirModeZx Reverse where x is 1 5 depending on selected zone 6 1 6 6 Measuring principle...

Страница 127: ...I _ A I KN EQUATION1546 V1 EN Equation 24 Where V_A I_A and IN are the phase voltage phase current and residual current present to the IED KN is defined as Z0 Z1 KN 3 Z1 EQUATION 2105 V1 EN 0 0 0 Z R jX EQUATION2106 V1 EN 1 1 1 Z R jX EQUATION2107 V1 EN Where R0 is the resistive zero sequence reach X0 is the reactive zero sequence reach R1 is the resistive positive sequence reach X1 is the reactiv...

Страница 128: ...MPDIS 21 handles the CVT transients internally and if setting CVTFltr is Enabled then input voltage profile is corrected accordingly CVT filter is designed to reduce the CVT transients Use CvtFltr setting to enable or disable the CVT filter The filter detects the fault and switches the filter coefficient to give correct voltage values to the measurement loops When CvtFltr is Enabled all the loops ...

Страница 129: ...MhoDirMode Directional DirMode Forward Reverse PICKUP OR AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR OR OR OR BlinderModeZx Enabled Disabled LoadEnchMode Enabled Disabled ANSI09000243 V4 EN Figure 49 Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL external start condition 6 1 6 9 Zone tripping logic Zone timer handler is a special feature provided in ZQMPDIS 21 function Different...

Страница 130: ...ually from phase to ground and phase to phase measurement loops Timers linked Start of timers linked within zone either phase to ground or phase to phase will start both timers within zone Internal start Internal common start of timers from all the 5 zones Start from PhSel Common start of timers from phSelLogic Start signal if direction condition is forward for the particular phase and also the zo...

Страница 131: ... In Angle at 0 degrees and 85 degrees Fault resistance phase to ground 1 00 3000 00 Ω loop Fault resistance phase to phase 1 00 3000 00 Ω loop Line angle for zones 0 180 degrees Magnitude of ground return compensation factor KN for zones 0 00 3 00 Angle for ground return compensation factor KN for zones 180 180 degrees Dynamic overreach 5 at 85 degrees measured with CVT s and 0 5 SIR 30 Impedance ...

Страница 132: ...e to phase elements 10 90 degrees Reverse reach of phase to phase loop 0 005 3000 000 Ω phase Magnitude of ground return compensation factor KN 0 00 3 00 Angle for ground compensation factor KN 180 180 degrees Dynamic overreach 5 at 85 degrees measured with CVT s and 0 5 SIR 30 Timers 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Operate time 30 ms typically Reset ratio less than 105 6 2 Phase selection with load encr...

Страница 133: ...ult resistance coverage difficult to achieve Therefore FDPSPDIS 21 has a built in algorithm for load encroachment which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information about faulty phase s which can be used for fault ana...

Страница 134: ...LEAN Fault detected in phase B reverse direction REV_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C reverse direction REV_G BOOLEAN Ground fault detected in reverse direction NDIR_A BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase A NDIR_B BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase B NDIR_C BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase C NDIR_G BOOLEAN Non directional start Phase Ground FWD_1PH BOOLEAN...

Страница 135: ...I0 pickup X1 0 50 3000 00 0 01 40 00 Positive sequence reactance reach RFltFwdPP 0 50 3000 00 ohm l 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance reach Phase Phase forward RFltRevPP 0 50 3000 00 ohm l 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance reach Phase Phase reverse RFltFwdPG 1 00 9000 00 ohm l 0 01 100 00 Fault resistance reach Phase Ground forward RFltRevPG 1 00 9000 00 ohm l 0 01 100 00 Fault resistance reach Phase Ground r...

Страница 136: ...urrent signals are filtered by Fourier s recursive filter and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements The characteristic is basically non directional but FDPSPDIS 21 uses information from the directional function ZDNRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse direction The pickup condition STCNDZI is essentially based on the following crit...

Страница 137: ...tion of Phase selection with load encroachment quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS 21 The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic for more information refer to section Load encroachment The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directional function ZDNRDIR It shall be connected to the STDIR output o...

Страница 138: ...cteristic for FDPSPDIS 21 function at phase to ground fault is according to figure 53 The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60 The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground return path defined according to equation 26 and equation 27 0 1 3 R R RN EQUATION1256 V1 EN Equation 26 0 1 3 X X XN EQUATION1257 V1 EN Equation 27 Sectio...

Страница 139: ...s this the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 28 and equation 29 0 3 I 0 5 IMinPUPG EQUATION2108 ANSI V1 EN Equation 28 0 0 3 _ 3 max 100 I Enable PG I Iph EQUATION1812 ANSI V1 EN Equation 29 where IMinPUPG is the minimum operation current for forward zones 3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase to gro...

Страница 140: ...r X1 X1 60 deg 60 deg 0 5 RFltFwdPP 0 5 RFltRevPP 0 5 RFltRevPP 0 5 RFltRevPP 1 Kr tan 60deg 0 5 RFltFwdPP phase W phase W ANSI05000670 V2 EN Figure 54 The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS 21 at phase to phase fault setting parameters in italic directional lines drawn as line dot dot line ohm phase domain In the same way as the condition for phase to ground fault there are current conditions...

Страница 141: ...se currents 6 2 6 3 Three phase faults The operation conditions for three phase faults are the same as for phase to phase fault that is equation 30 equation 31 and equation 32 are used to release the operation of the function However the reach is expanded by a factor 2 3 approximately 1 1547 in all directions At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees counter clockwise The character...

Страница 142: ...uring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance The load encroachment functionality is always active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 56 As illustrated the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in...

Страница 143: ...output signal STCNDZI is selected the characteristic for FDPSPDIS 21 and also zone measurement depending on settings will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic see figure 57 left illustration When output signal DLECND is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 57 The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the dis...

Страница 144: ...ent is activated When FDPSPDIS 21 is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 58 The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction Thus the operating area is highlighted in black Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 138 Technical manual ...

Страница 145: ... subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 59 Due to the 30 degree rotation the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R axis Consequently it will be more or less neces...

Страница 146: ... a fault between two phases is presented in fig 60 Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase to phase fault At the same time the characteristic will shrink divided by 2 3 from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach which is valid at load or thre...

Страница 147: ...hould also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one 6 2 6 5 Minimum operate currents The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS 21 is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values The phase to ground loop n is blocked if In IMinPUPG where In is the RMS value of the current in phase n A or B or C The phase to phase ...

Страница 148: ... criteria A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults A DLECND output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria refer to figure 61 This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phase to phase and phase to ground zone measu...

Страница 149: ...eous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations Internal signals DFWn and DFWnm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm Designation FW figure 64 represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV figure 63 represents the reverse direction Figure 63 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZI output signal ...

Страница 150: ...C AND INDIR_BC AND INDIR_CA OR OR OR OR REV_A REV_G REV_B REV_C INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_C INDIR_AB INDIR_BC INDIR_CA Bool to integer STCNDZI OR REV_PP 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 ANSI10000546 V2 EN Figure 63 Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 144 Technical manual ...

Страница 151: ...3PH OR FWD_PP 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 0 15 ms 0 15 ms ANSI05000201 V3 EN Figure 64 Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction Figure 65 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and PICKUP where internal signals NDIR_PP FWD_PP and REV_PP are the equivalent to internal signals NDIR_G FWD_G and REV_G but for the phase to phase loops 1MR...

Страница 152: ...rPE Disabled AND OR FWD_G REV_G NDIR_G FWD_PP REV_PP NDIR_PP OR OR OR PICKUP ANSI10000187 2 en vsd 0 0 tPP 0 0 tPG ANSI10000187 V2 EN Figure 65 TRIP and PICKUP signal logic Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 146 Technical manual ...

Страница 153: ...identification with load enchroachment for mho FMPSPDIS 21 6 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho FMPSPDIS S00346 V1 EN 6 3 2 Functionality The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop s in the distance function dependent...

Страница 154: ...ction Zpick up BOOLEAN 0 Pick up from under impedance function TR3PH BOOLEAN 0 Three phase tripping initiated Table 38 FMPSPDIS Output signals Name Type Description PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal PU_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase A PU_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B PU_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C PHG_FLT BOOLEAN Ground fault detected PHSCND INTEGER Binary coded starts from pha...

Страница 155: ...200 IB 1 10 Positive sequence current level for identification of three phase fault in of IBase V1MinOp 5 100 VB 1 20 Minimum operate positive sequence voltage for phase selection V2MinOp 1 100 VB 1 5 Minimum operate negative sequence voltage for phase selection INRelPG 10 100 IB 1 20 3I0 limit for release Phase Ground measuring loops in of maximum phase current 3I0BLK_PP 10 100 IB 1 40 3I0 limit ...

Страница 156: ...this point the notch filter produces significant non zero output The filter output is processed by the delta function The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a fault has occurred and determines the faulty phases The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the following criterion is fulfilled only phase A shown Max ΔVA ΔVB ΔVC ...

Страница 157: ...mines the largest quantity and asserts that phase If phase to phase fault is detected the two largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate block Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape Theref...

Страница 158: ... the magnitude of zero sequence current and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative sequence voltage It is a complement to the ground fault signal built in in the Symmetrical component based phase selector The phase to ground loops are released if both of the following criteria are fulfilled 3I0 IBase 0 5 3I0 maxIph INRelPG where maxIph is the maximal current magnitude found in any of ...

Страница 159: ...0 300 180 A B sector B C sector C A sector 60 ANSI06000383 2 en vsd VC VA VB VA Ref ANSI06000383 V2 EN Figure 67 Definition of fault sectors for phase to phase fault The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between the sequence voltages V2 and V1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 67 and the following conditions are fulfilled V1 V1MinOP V2 V2Min...

Страница 160: ...rmines faulty phase at single phase to ground fault by determine the angle between V2 and I0 320 200 80 AG sector CG sector BG sector V2A Ref en06000384_ansi vsd ANSI06000384 V1 EN Figure 68 Condition 1 Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0 The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as input to the V2 and I0 function block The inpu...

Страница 161: ...he following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals V2 V2MinOp 3I0 0 05 IBase 3I0 maxIph INRelPG where V2 and 3I0 are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current 3I0 V2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence voltage maxIph is the maximum phase current The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fau...

Страница 162: ... negative sequence minimum operating voltages 20 140 260 AG sector CG sector BG sector V1A Ref en06000413_ansi vsd ANSI06000413 V1 EN Figure 70 Condition 2 V2 and V1 angle relationship If both conditions are true and there is sector match the fault is deemed as single phase to ground If the sectors however do not match the fault is determined to be the complement of the second condition that is a ...

Страница 163: ...tude V1Level I1LowLevel are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current IMaxLoad is the setting of the maximum load current Fault evaluation and selection logic The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according to figure 71 Only phase A is shown in the figure If the internal signal 3 Phase fault is activated all four outputs PICKUP PU_A PU_B...

Страница 164: ...surement can be switched Enabled Disabledin the respective Five zone distance protection mho characteristic ZMOPDIS function The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 72 As illustrated the resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment function as...

Страница 165: ...cted to the zone measuring element in ZMOPDIS 21 for releasing the correct measuring loop s Note In case none of the sequence component based phase selector or the delta logic phase selector has identified a faulty phase all measuring loops in ZMQPDIS 21 are released If the phase selectors manage to identify one or more faulted phases only the related measuring loop s is released The output PHSCND...

Страница 166: ...1 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Load encroachment criteria Load resistance forward and reverse 1 00 3000 W phase 5 70 degrees 5 0 static accuracy Conditions Voltage range 0 1 1 1 x Vn Current range 0 5 30 x In 6 4 Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults ZDARDIR 21D 6 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identific...

Страница 167: ...ZDARDIR 21D Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current Input V3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage Input I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL Polarisation current signals DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal Table 44 ZDARDIR 21D Output signals Name Type Description FWD_G BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase earth directional element REV_G BOOLEAN Revers...

Страница 168: ...m 0 01 40 00 Boost factor in V0comp and V2comp polarization Table 47 ZDARDIR 21D Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSelector 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 6 4 6 Operation principle A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation The positive sequence memory polarized elements are generally preferred The benefits ...

Страница 169: ...oltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current at the location of the protection The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 74 3V0 3I0 AngleRCA AngleOp en06000417_ansi vsd ANSI06000417 V1 EN Figure 74 Principle for zero sequence voltage polarized additional directional element Negative sequence voltage polarization is uti...

Страница 170: ...e case where the line impedance is much greater than the source impedance Z0SA Z0SB Z0Line V0 I0 IF I0 V0 K I0 V0 K I0 Characteristic angle en06000418_ansi vsd ANSI06000418 V1 EN Figure 75 Principle for zero sequence compensation Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase information about direction to fault This is why it is an AND function with the normal d...

Страница 171: ... mho ZDNRDIR 21D 6 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Directional impedance quadrilateral and mho ZDNRDIR 21D 6 5 2 Functionality The evaluation of the direction to the fault is made in the directional element ZDNRDIR 21D for the quadrilateral and mho characteristic distance protections ZQMPDIS 21 6 5 3 Function b...

Страница 172: ...gs basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description AngNegRes 90 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction AngDir 5 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction IMinPUPG 5 30 IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase to ground loops IMinPUPP 5 30 IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current 2 x current of lagging phase for Phase to phase loop...

Страница 173: ...NRDIR for the quadrilateral and mho characteristic distance protections ZQDPDIS and ZMOPDIS Equation 35 and equation 36 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase to ground fault and phase to phase fault respectively 0 85 1 0 15 1 Re V A V AM AngDir Ang AngNeg s IA EQUATION1618 V1 EN Equation 35 0 85 1 0 15 1 Re V AB V ABM AngDir Ang AngNeg s IAB EQUATION1620 V1 EN E...

Страница 174: ...t be changed unless system studies show the necessity When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR is used together with Fullscheme distance protection mho characteristic ZMHPDIS the following settings for parameter DirEvalType is vital alternative Comparator is strongly recommended alternative Imp Comp should generally not be used alternative Impedance should not be used This...

Страница 175: ...1 if start in L1N and L3N are choosen the value is 1 4 5 The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5 of the set base voltage VBase So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close in faults For close in three phase faults the V1AM memory voltage based on the same positive sequence voltage ensures correct directional discr...

Страница 176: ...sed in isolated or high impedance grounded networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at cross country fault Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase to ground faults in isolated and high impedance grounded networks where such faults are not to be cleared by distance protection For cross country faults the logic selects either the leading or the lag...

Страница 177: ...ded output release signal 6 6 5 Settings Table 56 PPLPHIZ Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description OperMode No Filter NoPref 1231c 1321c 123a 132a 213a 231a 312a 321a No Filter Operating mode c cyclic a acyclic PU27PN 10 0 100 0 VB 1 0 70 0 Operate value of phase undervoltage in of VBase PU27PP 10 0 100 0 VB 1 0 50 0 Operate value of line to line undervoltage in of VBas...

Страница 178: ...hase preference at cross country faults No pref No preference trip is blocked during single phase to ground faults trip is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross country fault 1231 c Cyclic 1231c A before B before C before C 1321 c Cyclic 1321c A before C before B before A 123 a Acyclic 123a A before B beforeC 132 a Acyclic 132a A before C beforeB 213 a Acyclic 213a B before A be...

Страница 179: ... below the setting parameter PU27PN for more than 20 ms The second part phase preference evaluation uses the internal signal DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input signal PHSEL together with phase selection pickup condition from phase selection functions connected to input PHSEL and the information from the setting parameter OperMode are used to determin...

Страница 180: ... data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value phase to phase and phase to neutral undervoltage 10 0 100 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Reset ratio undervoltage 105 Operate value residual voltage 5 0 300 0 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Reset ratio residual voltage 95 Operate value residual current 10 200 of IBase 1 0 of In for I In 1 0 of I for I In Reset ratio residual current 95 Timers 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms...

Страница 181: ...ck of all distance protection zones Occurrence of ground fault currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB 68 function to allow fault clearance 6 7 3 Function block ANSI09000058 1 en vsd ZMRPSB 68 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 I0CHECK EXT_PSD PICKUP ZOUT ZIN ANSI09000058 V1 EN Figure 82 ZMRPSB 78 function block 6 7 4 Signals Table 60 ZMRPSB 68 Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GR...

Страница 182: ...y forward R1LIn 0 10 1000 00 ohm 0 01 30 00 Line resistance for inner characteristic angle R1FInFw 0 10 1000 00 ohm 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line forward X1InRv 0 10 3000 00 ohm 0 01 30 00 Inner reactive boundary reverse R1FInRv 0 10 1000 00 ohm 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance line to inner resistive boundary reverse OperationLdCh Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation of lo...

Страница 183: ...lt Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 6 7 6 Operation principle Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68 function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment as shown in figure 83 Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through...

Страница 184: ...unction setting parameters in italic The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB 68 function is performed by solving equation 37 and equation 38 Typical equations are for phase A similar equations are applicable for phases B and C Re A A V Rset I æ ö ç è ø EQUATION1557 V1 EN Equation 37 Im A A V Xset I æ ö ç è ø EQUATION1558 V1 EN Equation 38 The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries Section 6 1MRK 506...

Страница 185: ... the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary DFw is calculated This value is valid for R direction in...

Страница 186: ...irection The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw DFw where DFw RLdOutFw KLdRFw RLdOutFw The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as X1InRv DRv where DRv RLd...

Страница 187: ...time delay set on the tW waiting timer The upper part of figure 84 internal input signal ZOUT_A ZIN_A AND gates and tP timers are duplicated for phase B and C All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings ANSI05000113 2 en vsd AND ZINA AND DET A OR AND AND ZOUTA loop ZOUTB ZOUTC OR detected OR loop 0 tP1 0 0 tP2 0 0 0 tW ANSI05000113 V2 EN Figure 84 Detection of power swing in phase ...

Страница 188: ...68 The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh Disabled but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral There are three different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output PICKUP signal instantaneou...

Страница 189: ...t 0 degrees and 85 degrees Resistive reach 0 10 1000 00 W phase Timers 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Minimum operate current 5 30 of IBase 1 0 of In 6 8 Automatic switch onto fault logic voltage and current based ZCVPSOF 6 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Automatic switch onto fault logic voltage and current based ZC...

Страница 190: ...ne to be accelerated by SOTF Table 67 ZCVPSOF Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic 6 8 5 Settings Table 68 ZCVPSOF Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disable Enable Mode Impedance VILevel VILvl Imp VILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function AutoInit Disabled Enabled ...

Страница 191: ...ted during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to Enabled When the setting AutoInit is Disabled the function is activated by an external binary input BC To get a trip one of the following operation modes must also be selected by the parameter Mode Mode Impedance trip is released if the input ZACC is activated normal connected to non directional distance protectio...

Страница 192: ...K AutiInit Enabled ZACC OR t 15 TRIP ANSI09000398 2 en vsd UILevel detector IA IB IC VA VB VC IphPickup UVPickup deadLine AND AND OR AND OR SOTFUILevel BC Mode Impedance Mode VILevel Mode VILvl Imp t t t tDLD tSOFT tDuration ANSI09000398 V2 EN Figure 87 Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic voltage and current based Section 6 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Impedance protection 186 Tec...

Страница 193: ...of dead line 1 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Delay following dead line detection input before Automatic switch into fault logic function is automatically enabled 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Time period after circuit breaker closure in which Automatic switch into fault logic function is active 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 6 Impedance protection 187 Technical manual ...

Страница 194: ...188 ...

Страница 195: ... The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short circuit protection function 7 1 3 Function block ANSI08000001 1 en vsd PHPIOC 50 I3P BLOCK TRIP ANSI08000001 V1 EN Figure 88 PHPIOC 50 function block 7 1 4 Signals Table 71 PHPIOC 50 Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group...

Страница 196: ...EAL A Current in phase C 7 1 7 Operation principle The sampled analog phase currents are pre processed in a discrete Fourier filter DFT block The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency components as well as sampled values of each phase current These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3 phase output function PHPIOC 50 In...

Страница 197: ...ic overreach 5 at t 100 ms 7 2 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection phase segregated output SPTPIOC 50 7 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection phase segregated output SPTPIOC 3I SYMBOL Z V1 EN 50 7 2 2 Functionality The instantaneous phase overcurrent function for sing...

Страница 198: ...ommon trip signal TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C 7 2 5 Settings Table 79 SPTPIOC 50 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation Pickup 5 2500 IB 1 200 Phase current pickup in of IBase Table 80 SPTPIOC 50 Non group settings basic Na...

Страница 199: ...e current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true This signal will without delay activate the output signal TR_x x A B or C for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases The SPTPIOC 50 function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK 7 2 8 Technical data Table 82 SPTPIOC 50 Technical data Function Range or valu...

Страница 200: ...otection function 3 phase output OC4PTOC 51 67 has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4 Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available The directional function is voltage polarized with memory The function can be set to be directional or non directional independently for each of the steps Second harmonic blocking level ...

Страница 201: ...P SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 Table 84 OC4PTOC 51_67 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 TR3 BOOLEAN Trip ...

Страница 202: ...f step 1 off non directional forward reverse Characterist1 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 I1 5 2500 IB 1 1000 Phase current operate level for step1 in of IBase t1 0 00...

Страница 203: ...onal Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 4 off non directional forward reverse Characterist4 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4 I4 5 2500 IB 1 175 Phase current op...

Страница 204: ...estrain Table 87 OC4PTOC 51_67 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups MeasType DFT RMS DFT Selection between DFT and RMS measurement 7 3 6 Monitored data Table 88 OC4PTOC 51_67 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DIRL1 INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction for ...

Страница 205: ...straint Mode Selection dirPhAFlt dirPhBFlt dirPhCFlt harmRestrBlock enableDir enableStep1 4 DirectionalMode1 4 faultState Element faultState I3P V3P PICKUP TRIP ANSI05000740 V2 EN Figure 91 Functional overview of OC4PTOC 51 67 The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre processing function block Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase ove...

Страница 206: ...asured value DFT or RMS do not influence the operation of directional part of OC4PTOC 51 67 Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for OC4PTOC 51 67 function which simplifies testing commissioning and in service operational checking of the function A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fun...

Страница 207: ...r A A V V I I ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN Equation 44 _ _ ref B B dir B B V V I I ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN Equation 45 _ _ ref C C dir C C V V I I ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN Equation 46 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 7 Current protection 201 Technical manual ...

Страница 208: ...for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section Inverse time characteristics All four steps in OC4PTOC 51 67 can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK The binary input B...

Страница 209: ...tio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab setting any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the OC4PTOC 51_67 function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one...

Страница 210: ...time nondirectional pickup function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Reset time pickup function 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Operate time directional pickup function 50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Reset time directional pickup function 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 1 Note Timing accuracy only valid ...

Страница 211: ...vidually The tripping can be configured for one and or three phase 7 4 3 Function block ANSI10000216 3 en vsd OC4SPTOC 51_67 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4 PU_A PU_B PU_C PU2NDHARM ANSI10000216 V3 EN Figure 95 OC4SPTOC 51_67 function block 7 4 4 Signals Table 90 OC4SPTOC 51_67 Input signals Name Type Default Descript...

Страница 212: ...ip signal from step 4 TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C START BOOLEAN General pickup signal ST1 BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 ST2 BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 2 ST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3 ST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4 STL1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A STL2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B STL3...

Страница 213: ... Definite time delay of step 1 k1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 IMin1 5 10000 IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 DirMode2 Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 off non directional forward reverse I2 5 2500...

Страница 214: ...ime delay for step 4 IMin4 5 10000 IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step4 in of IBase t4Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Table 93 OC4SPTOC 51_67 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 2ndHarmStab 5 100 IB 1 20 Pickup of second harm restraint in of Fundamental HarmRestrain1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable block o...

Страница 215: ...e 0 No direction Direction for phase C IL1 REAL A Current in phase A IL2 REAL A Current in phase B IL3 REAL A Current in phase C 7 4 7 Operation principle The function is divided into four different sub functions one for each step For each step x where x is step 1 2 3 and 4 an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx Disabled Non directional Forward Reverse The protection design can be decomposed in f...

Страница 216: ..._C are common for all steps This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps It shall be noted that the selection of measured value DFT or RMS do not influence the operation of directional part of OC4SPTOC 51_67 Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for OC4SPTOC 51_67...

Страница 217: ...d If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step The time characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section Inverse time char...

Страница 218: ...tics see table 656 table 657 and table 658 15 curve types 1 ANSI IEEE C37 112 IEC 60255 151 3 or 40 ms 0 10 k 3 00 1 5 x Iset I 20 x Iset Operate time nondirectional pickup function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Reset time pickup function 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Operate time directional pickup function 50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Reset time directional pickup function 35 ms typica...

Страница 219: ...impedance EFPIOC 50N is configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input EFPIOC 50N can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK 7 5 3 Function block ANSI08000003 1 en vsd EFPIOC 50N I3P BLOCK TRIP ANSI08000003 V1 EN Figure 97 EFPIOC 50N function block 7 5 4 Signals Table 97 EFPIOC 50N Input si...

Страница 220: ... fundamental frequency components of the residual current as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived This current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 50N In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function Pickup If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the...

Страница 221: ...e four step residual overcurrent protection zero or negative sequence direction EF4PTOC 51N 67N has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4 Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available EF4PTOC 51N 67N can be set directional or non directional independently for each of the steps The directional part of the function can be...

Страница 222: ... blocking teleprotection scheme Current reversal and weak end infeed functionality are available as well 7 6 3 Function block ANSI08000004 2 en vsd EF4PTOC 51N_67N I3P V3P I3PPOL I3PDIR BLOCK BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 BFI_3P PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4 PUFW PUREV 2NDHARMD ANSI08000004 V2 EN Figure 98 EF4PTOC 51N 67N function block 7 6 4 Signals Table 103 EF4PTOC Input signal...

Страница 223: ...neral start signal ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1 ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2 ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3 ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4 STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal 2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal 7 6 5 Settings Table 105 EF4PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On...

Страница 224: ...nv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay curve type for step 1 IN1 1 2500 IB 1 100 Operate residual current level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Independent definite time delay of step 1 k1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 IMin1 1 10000 I...

Страница 225: ... directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 4 off non directional forward reverse Characterist4 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay curve type for step 4 IN4 1 2500 IB 1 17 Operate ...

Страница 226: ...evel IPol REAL A Polarizing current level UPOLIANG REAL deg Angle between polarizing voltage and operating current IPOLIANG REAL deg Angle between polarizing current and operating current IOPDIR REAL A Amplitude of the directional operating quantity 7 6 7 Operation principle Four step residual overcurrent protection zero or negative sequence direction EF4PTOC 51N 67N function has the following fou...

Страница 227: ... into the pre processing block connected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula will take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input same SMAI AI3P connected to I3P input If zero s...

Страница 228: ...N 67N analog function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600 In such case the pre processing block will calculate 3V0 from the first three inputs into the pre processing block by using the following formula VPol 3V0 VA VB VC ANSIEQUATION2407 V1 EN Equation 49 where VA VB VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages In order to use this al...

Страница 229: ...ated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre processing block connected to EF4PTOC 51N 67N function input I3PPOL This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE point and ground current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE connected transformer winding For some special line ...

Страница 230: ...ula IPol S Pol Pol V Zo I RNPol j XNPOL I EQUATION2013 ANSI V1 EN Equation 53 which will be then used together with the phasor of the operating directional current in order to determine the direction to the ground fault Forward Reverse In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin Dual polarizing ...

Страница 231: ...rrent steps with integrated directional comparison step for communication based ground fault protection schemes permissive or blocking 3 Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed in blocking during switching of parallel transformers Each part is described separately in the following sections 7 6 7 6 Four residual overcurrent steps Each overcurrent step uses operating quan...

Страница 232: ...ModeSelx Non directional DirModeSelx Forward DirModeSelx Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR OR STEPx_DIR_Int ANSI09000638 3 en vsd 0 0 tx AND 0 0 txMin AND ANSI09000638 V3 EN Figure 99 Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK Output signals for respective step PU_STx and TRSTx and can be blocked from the binary i...

Страница 233: ...shown in figure 100 in order to determine the direction of the ground fault PUREV 0 6 INDirPU PUFW RCA 85 deg 40 of INDirPU INDirPU RCA 65 VPol 3V0 I 3I op 0 RCA 85 deg RCA 85 deg Characteristic for PUREV Characteristic for PUFW Characteristic for reverse release of measuring steps Characteristic for forward release of measuring steps RCA 85 deg ANSI11000243 1 en ai Operating area Operating area A...

Страница 234: ...everse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR BLKTR OR STAGEx_DIR_Int ANSI11000281 1 en vsd AND AND Characteristx Inverse Inverse ANSI11000281 1 en vsd 0 0 tx 0 0 txMin ANSI11000281 V1 EN Figure 101 Operating characteristic for ground fault directional element using the zero sequence components Section 7 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Current protection 228 Technical manual ...

Страница 235: ...l element using the negative sequence components Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristi...

Страница 236: ...directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 103 X a a b b IDirPU polMethod Voltage polMethod Dual OR FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int BLOCK STAGE1_DIR_Int 0 6 X 0 4 AND STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int OR PUREV VPolMin IPolMin AngleRCA T F 0 0 X T F RNPol XNPol 0 0 Directional Characteristic FWD RVS AND AND AND PUFW FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int AND ...

Страница 237: ...be selectively blocked by parameter setting HarmRestrainx When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF4PTOC 51N_67N function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one a b a b BLOCK AND IOP Extract second harmonic current component Extract fundamental current component X 2ndHarmStab a b a b a b a b 0 07 IBase IEC13000015 1 en vsd 2NDHARMD UseStartValue IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 a b a b ...

Страница 238: ...x Iset Minimum polarizing voltage Zero sequence 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Minimum polarizing voltage Negative sequence 1 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Minimum polarizing current Zero sequence 2 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Minimum polarizing current Negative sequence 2 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Real part of source Z used for current polarization 0 50 1000 00 W phase Imaginary part of source Z used for current pola...

Страница 239: ...ts In addition to this the magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on the fault location in the network The protection can be selected to use either the residual current 3I0 cosj or 3I0 j or residual power component 3V0 3I0 cos j for operating quantity There is also available one non directional 3I0 step and one non directional 3V0 overvoltage tripping step 7 7 3 Function block ANSI08...

Страница 240: ...tional residual overcurrent function STNDIN BOOLEAN Pick up of non directional residual overcurrent STUN BOOLEAN Pick up of non directional residual overvoltage STFW BOOLEAN Pick up of directional function for fault in forward direction STRV BOOLEAN Pick up of directional function for fault in reverse direction STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of...

Страница 241: ...l residual power mode OpINNonDir Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation of non directional residual overcurrent protection INNonDir 1 00 400 00 IB 0 01 10 00 Set level for non directional residual overcurrent in of IBase tINNonDir 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 1 000 Time delay for non directional residual overcurrent TimeChar ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V ...

Страница 242: ...e Values Range Unit Description INCOSPHI REAL A Mag of residual current along polarizing qty 3I0cos Fi RCA IN REAL A Measured magnitude of the residual current 3I0 UN REAL kV Measured magnitude of the residual voltage 3V0 SN REAL MVA Measured magnitude of residual power 3I03V0cos Fi RCA ANG FI RCA REAL deg Angle between 3V0 and 3I0 minus RCA Fi RCA 7 7 7 Operation principle 7 7 7 1 Function inputs...

Страница 243: ... a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only RCADir is set equal to 90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive The function operates when 3I0 cos φ gets larger than the set value 3V0 Vref 3I0 RCA 0 ROA 90 ang 3I0 ang 3Vref 3I0 cos en06000648_ansi vsd Vref ANSI06000648 V1 EN Figure 1...

Страница 244: ...areactivated If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated The trip from this sub function has definite time delay There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle φ is larger than a set value as shown in figure 108 This is equivalent to blocking of the function if φ ROADir This option is used to ...

Страница 245: ... restriction The function indicates forward reverse direction to the fault Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos φ 180 the set value It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 109 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 7 Current protection 239 Technical manual ...

Страница 246: ...tion operates when 3I0 3V0 cos φ gets larger than the set value For trip both the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos φ the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set levels SN_PU INRelPU and VNRelPU Whenthefunctionis activatedbinaryoutputsignals PICKUP and PUDIRIN areactivated If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay setti...

Страница 247: ... is within the sector RCADir ROADir Vref 3V0 Operate area 3I0 RCA 0º ROA 80º ANSI06000652 2 en vsd ANSI06000652 V2 EN Figure 110 Example of characteristic For trip the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level INDirPU the release voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level VNRelPU and the angle φ shall be in the set sector ROADir and RCADir Whenthefunctionis activatedbinaryoutputs...

Страница 248: ...nction is using the calculated residual current derived as sum of the phase currents This will give a better ability to detect cross country faults with high residual current also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground fault protection will saturate This sub function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay The inverse time delay shall be ac...

Страница 249: ...nDirPU UN_PU OpMODE INcosPhi Pickup_N INCosPhiPU OpMODE INVNCosPhi INVNCosPhiPU Phi in RCA ROA OpMODE IN and Phi DirMode Forw Forw DirMode Rev Rev PUNDIN TRNDIN PUVN TRVN AND AND AND OR AND AND AND OR PUDIRIN PUFW PUREV 0 t 0 t 0 0 TimeChar DefTime TRDIRIN AND SN t TimeChar InvTime AND ANSI06000653 V1 EN Figure 111 Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground fault current protection 1MRK 50...

Страница 250: ...rrent 1 00 400 00 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In At low setting 5 of In 0 1 of In Operate level for non directional residual overvoltage 1 00 200 00 of VBase 0 5 of Vn at V Vn 0 5 of V at V Vn Residual release current for all directional modes 0 25 200 00 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In At low setting 0 25 1 00 of In 0 05 of In 1 00 5 00 of In 0 1 of In Residual release vo...

Страница 251: ...5 to 2 x Iset Reset time directional residual over current 85 ms typically at 2 to 0 5 x Iset Critical impulse time non directional residual over current 35 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time non directional residual over current 25 ms typically 7 8 Time delayed 2 step undercurrent protection UC2PTUC 37 7 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ide...

Страница 252: ...ree phase group signal for current input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Table 116 UC2PTUC 37 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal for step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal for step 2 RI BOOLEAN General pickup signal PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start of step 1 PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start of step 2 Sect...

Страница 253: ...le 118 UC2PTUC 37 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSelector 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 8 6 Operation principle Time delayed 2 step undercurrent protection UC2PTUC 37 function generates output signals PICKUP and TRIP The 2 steps in the function are identical hence only step1 is explained below UC2PTUC 37 function comp...

Страница 254: ...undercurrent limit step 1 5 0 100 0 of IBase in steps of 1 0 1 0 of In High set step of undercurrent limit step 2 5 0 100 0 of IBase in steps of 1 0 1 0 of In Time delayed operation of low set step step 1 0 000 60 000 s in steps of 1 ms 0 5 25 ms Time delayed operation of high set step step 2 0 000 60 000 s in steps of 1 ms 0 5 25 ms Reset ratio 105 7 9 Thermal overload protection one time constan...

Страница 255: ...lsius or in Fahrenheit depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload protection one time constant Fahrenheit LFPTTR 26 or Celsius LCPTTR An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is tripped Estimated time to trip before operation and estimated time to reclose after operation are presented 7 9 3 Function block LFPTTR 26 I3P BLOCK AMBTEMP...

Страница 256: ...l temperature sensor SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter Table 122 LFPTTR 26 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal TEMP REAL Calculated temperature of the device TEMPAMB REAL Ambient temperat...

Страница 257: ...mperature for reset of lockout after trip AmbiSens Disabled Enabled Disabled External temperature sensor available DefaultAmbTemp 50 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off DefaultTemp 50 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup Table 125 LFPTTR 26 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 ...

Страница 258: ...balBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 9 6 Monitored data Table 128 LFPTTR 26 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TTRIP INTEGER Estimated time to trip in min TENRECL INTEGER Estimated time to reset of lockout in min TEMP REAL Temperature Fahrenheit Calculated temperature of the device TEMPAMB REAL Temperature Fahrenheit Ambient temperature used in ...

Страница 259: ...ce current and Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level TripTemp a PICKUP output signal is activated The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as 1 1 1 t n n final n e t D æ ö Q Q Q Q ç è ø EQUATION1168 V1 EN Equation 57 where Qn is the calculated present temperature Qn 1 is the calcula...

Страница 260: ...o reconnect the tripped circuit The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp The time to lockout release is calculated that is a calculation of the cooling time to a set value The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET _ _ ln final lockout release lockout release final n t t æ ö Q Q ç...

Страница 261: ...mp AlarmTemp Actual Temp TripTemp ALARM TRIP Actual Temp Recl Temp Calculation of time to trip Calculation of time to reset of lockout TTRIP TENRECL ANSI09000637 2 en vsd Lock out logic LOCKOUT ANSI09000637 V2 EN Figure 114 Functional overview of LFPTTR LCPTTR 26 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 7 Current protection 255 Technical manual ...

Страница 262: ...s Alarm temperature 0 400 F 0 200 C 2 0 C 2 0 F Trip temperature 0 600 F 0 300 C 2 0 C 2 0 F Reset level temperature 0 600 F 0 300 C 2 0 C 2 0 F 7 10 Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output CCRBRF 50BF 7 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output C...

Страница 263: ...the user defined settings the function is triggered These conditions increase the security of the back up trip command CCRBRF 50BF function can be programmed to give a three phase re trip of the protected breaker to avoid inadvertent tripping of surrounding breakers 7 10 3 Function block ANSI09000272 1 en vsd CCRBRF 50BF I3P BLOCK BFI_3P 52A_A 52A_B 52A_C TRBU TRRET ANSI09000272 V1 EN Figure 115 C...

Страница 264: ...de Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check Retrip Off Operation mode of re trip logic Pickup_PH 5 200 IB 1 10 Phase current pickup in of IBase Pickup_N 2 200 IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of re trip t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Time delay of back up trip Table 134 CCRBRF 50BF Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default D...

Страница 265: ... the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening that is fast resetting of the current measurement If the current and or contact detection has not detected breaker ...

Страница 266: ...ontact Closed A ANSI09000977 2 en vsd FunctionMode OR OR Current Contact Current and Contact 1 Pickup_PH CB Closed A I_A ANSI09000977 V2 EN Figure 117 Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF 50BF CB position evaluation 200 ms AND AND OR OR OR TRRET_C TRRET_B BFP Started A Retrip Time Out A CB Closed A TRRET CB Pos Check No CBPos Check OR From other phases ANSI16000502 1 en vsd RetripMode 1 30 ms 0 0...

Страница 267: ...trip function Internal logical signals Current High A Current High B and Current High C have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH 7 10 8 Technical data Table 137 CCRBRF 50BF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate phase current 5 200 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Reset ratio phase current 95 Operate res...

Страница 268: ... the protected breaker fails to open CSPRBRF 50BF can be current based contact based or adaptive combination between these two principles A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criterion to achieve a high security against inadvertent operation A contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small CSPRBRF 50BF function current criteria...

Страница 269: ...ck up signal for all phases BFI_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase A breaker failure initiation BFI_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase B breaker failure initiation BFI_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase C breaker failure initiation 52a_A BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase A 52a_B BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase B 52a_C BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase C Table 139 CSPRBRF 50BF Output signals Name Type Description TRBU BOOL...

Страница 270: ... t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Time delay of back up trip t2MPh 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 60 000 Time delay of back up trip at multi phase pickup Table 141 CSPRBRF 50BF Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup_BlkCont 5 200 IB 1 20 Current for blocking of 52a operation in of Ibase Table 142 CSPRBRF 50BF Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default D...

Страница 271: ...ed by the function both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening that is fast resetting of the current measurement If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back up timer has run its time a back up trip is initiated Further the following possibilities are available...

Страница 272: ... ANSI09000977 V2 EN Figure 122 Simplified logic scheme of the CSPRBRF 50BF CB position evaluation 200 ms AND AND OR OR OR TRRET_C TRRET_B BFP Started A Retrip Time Out A CB Closed A TRRET CB Pos Check No CBPos Check OR From other phases ANSI16000504 1 en vsd RetripMode 1 30 ms 0 0 t1 TRRET_A ANSI16000504 V1 EN Figure 123 Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function Section 7 1MRK 506 335 U...

Страница 273: ...trip function Internal logical signals Current High A Current High B and Current High C have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH 7 11 8 Technical data Table 144 CSPRBRF 50BF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate phase current 5 200 of lBase 1 0 of In at I In 1 0 of I at I In Reset ratio phase current 95 Operate re...

Страница 274: ...enance and the line disconnector is opened line side voltage transformers will be on the disconnected part of the line The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked The stub protection STBPTOC 50STB covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a normally ope...

Страница 275: ...C 50STB Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation IPickup 1 2500 IB 1 200 Pickup current level in of IBase Table 148 STBPTOC 50STB Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 12 6 Monitored data Table 149 STBPT...

Страница 276: ...ed If the fault current remains during the timer delay t the TRIP output signal is activated The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input BLOCK TRIP STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION PU_A PU_B PU_C OR AND ENABLE en05000731_ansi vsd ANSI05000731 V1 EN Figure 126 Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection 50STB 7 12 8 Technical data Table 150 STBPTOC 50STB technical data Function Range or v...

Страница 277: ...on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions Normally the affected breaker is tripped to correct such a situation If the situation warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from the circuit breaker logic with additional cri...

Страница 278: ...nit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation tTrip 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 300 Time delay between trip condition and trip signal ContactSel Disabled PD signal from CB Disabled Contact function selection CurrentSel Disabled CB oper monitor Continuous monitor Disabled Current function selection CurrUnsymPU 0 100 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current comp...

Страница 279: ... signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement The sampled analog phase currents are pre processed in a discrete Fourier filter DFT block From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived The smallest and the largest ph...

Страница 280: ...ernal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled then two different criteria can generate a trip signal TRIP Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker Unsymmetrical current detection 7 13 7 1 Pole discrepancy si...

Страница 281: ...reaker through the inputs CLOSECMD for closing command information and OPENCMD for opening command information These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions that is close command from a control functio...

Страница 282: ...ion I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for current inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 158 BRCPTOC 46 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal of the protection logic 7 14 5 Settings Table 159 BRCPTOC 46 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disab...

Страница 283: ...e current is below 50 of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same phase This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set...

Страница 284: ...ure 131 Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 46 7 14 8 Technical data Table 162 BRCPTOC 46 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum phase current for operation 5 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Unbalance current operation 50 90 of maximum current 2 0 of In Timer 0 00 60 000 s 0 5 25 ms Trip time for pickup function 35 ms typically Reset time for pickup function 30 ms t...

Страница 285: ...he power system There are a number of applications where such functionality is needed Some of them are detection of reversed active power flow detection of high reactive power flow Each function has two steps with definite time delay 7 15 2 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32 7 15 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 devi...

Страница 286: ...OLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Table 164 GOPPDOP 32 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1 TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2 BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 1 PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 2 P REAL Active Power P...

Страница 287: ... 500 0 0 1 1 0 Power setting for stage 2 in of calculated power base value Angle2 180 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 0 0 Characteristic angle for stage 2 TripDelay2 0 010 6000 000 s 0 001 1 000 Trip delay for stage 2 Table 166 GOPPDOP 32 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description k 0 00 0 99 0 01 0 00 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement V and I Table 167 GOPPDOP 32 Non ...

Страница 288: ...l underpower protection GUPPDUP 37 7 15 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP P 2 SYMBOL LL V2 EN 37 7 15 3 2 Function block ANSI08000507 1 en vsd GUPPDUP 37 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK1 BLK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 BFI_3P PICKUP1 PICKUP2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT ANSI08000507 V1 EN Figure 133 GU...

Страница 289: ...gnal from stage 2 P REAL Active Power PPERCENT REAL Active power in of calculated power base value Q REAL Reactive power QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in of calculated power base value 7 15 3 4 Settings Table 171 GUPPDUP 37 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disable Enable OpMode1 Disabled UnderPower UnderPower Operatio...

Страница 290: ...ep Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Mode A B C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and voltage 7 15 3 5 Monitored data Table 174 GUPPDUP 37 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description P REAL MW Active Power PPERCENT REAL Active power in of calculated power base value Q REAL MVAr Reactive power QPE...

Страница 291: ...ing blocks The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 175 Table 175 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A B C A A B B C C S V I V I V I EQUATION2055 ANSI V1 EN Equation 61 Arone AB A BC C S V I V I EQUATION2056 ANSI V1 EN Equation 62 PosSeq 3 PosSeq PosSeq S V I EQUATION2057 ANSI V1 EN Equation 63 AB AB A B...

Страница 292: ...lated power component is larger than the pick up value After a set time delay TripDelay1 2 a trip TRIP1 2 signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function The absolute ...

Страница 293: ...he filter properties Default value for parameter TD is 0 00 With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay When TD is set to value bigger than 0 the filtering is enabled A typical value for TD 0 92 in case of slow operating functions 7 15 5 Technical data Table 176 GOPPDOP GUPPDUP 32 37 technical data Function Range or v...

Страница 294: ...ward ground faults Additionally it is applied in applications on cables where zero sequence impedance depends on the fault current return paths but the cable negative sequence impedance is practically constant The directional function is current and voltage polarized The function can be set to forward reverse or non directional independently for each step Both steps are provided with a settable de...

Страница 295: ...t function OC1 ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier step1 OC1 BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2 ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier step 2 OC2 Table 178 DNSPTOC 46 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 OC1 TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 OC2 START BOOLEAN General pick...

Страница 296: ...or step 1 OC1 DirMode_OC1 Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 1 non directional forward reverse DirPrinc_OC1 I V IcosPhi V I V Measuring on I V or IcosPhi V for step 1 OC1 ActLowVolt1_VM Non directional Block Block Low votlage level action for step 1 Non directional Block Memory Operation_OC2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation DISABLE ENABLE for step 2 OC2 Sta...

Страница 297: ...irection of these steps to forward reverse or non directional by setting parameters DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2 At too low polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked or non directional This is controlled by settings ActLowVolt1_VM and ActLowVolt2_VM 7 16 8 Technical data Table 182 DNSPTOC 46 Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current 2 0 200 0 of IBase 1 ...

Страница 298: ...ally at 0 to 10 x Iset Reset time directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Dynamic overreach 10 at t 300 ms Section 7 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Current protection 292 Technical manual ...

Страница 299: ...tion can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long time delayed back up to primary protection UV2PTUV 27 has two voltage steps where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite time delayed Step 2 is always definite time delayed UV2PTUV 27 has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage 8 1 3 Function block ANSI09000285 1 ...

Страница 300: ...1_C BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase C PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2 8 1 5 Settings Table 185 UV2PTUV 27 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable execution of step 1 Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Definite time Select...

Страница 301: ...tion type 8 1 6 Monitored data Table 187 UV2PTUV 27 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description V_A REAL kV Voltage in phase A V_B REAL kV Voltage in phase B V_C REAL kV Voltage in phase C 8 1 7 Operation principle Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27 is used to detect low power system voltage UV2PTUV 27 has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays If one two or thre...

Страница 302: ...ent principle Depending on the set ConnType value UV2PTUV 27 measures phase to ground or phase to phase voltages and compare against set values Pickup1 and Pickup2 The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKU...

Страница 303: ...es for at least the user set time delay This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode DT and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode TUV If the pickup condition with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time the corresponding pickup output is reset 8 1 7 3 Blocking It is possible to block Two step undervoltage prot...

Страница 304: ...wn in Figure 138 PICKUP PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C TRST1 PICKUP PU_ST2 TRST2 TRIP MinVoltSelector Pickup Trip Output Logic Step1 Pickup Trip Output Logic Step2 Phase C Phase B Phase A Phase C Phase B Phase A Timer t2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 Time integrator or Timer t1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR PICKUP VA or VAB VB or VBC VC or...

Страница 305: ...eset time pickup function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset40 ms typically at 0 5 to 1 2 xVset Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1 2 to 0 8 x Vset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 8 2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59 8 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 3U...

Страница 306: ...8 1 en vsd OV2PTOV 59 V3P BLOCK BLK1 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST2 PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 ANSI09000278 V1 EN Figure 139 OV2PTOV function block 59 8 2 4 Signals Table 189 OV2PTOV 59 Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 T...

Страница 307: ... out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 Pickup1 1 200 VB 1 120 Voltage start value DT IDMT in of VBase for step 1 t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definite time delay of step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 TD1 0 05 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for ...

Страница 308: ...measured voltages being above the set point If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay the corresponding trip signal is issued The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed Step 2 is always definite time delayed The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base v...

Страница 309: ... activate the PICKUP outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal a hysteresis is included 8 2 7 2 Time delay The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay DT or inverse timeovervoltage TOV Step 2 is always definite time...

Страница 310: ...016 V2 EN Figure 140 Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode DT and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode TOV If the PICKUP condition with respect to the measured voltage cease...

Страница 311: ...rier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition The design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59 is schematical...

Страница 312: ...ic Step 2 Phase C Phase B Phase A Phase C Phase B Phase A Timer t2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator or Timer t1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR VA or VAB VB or VBC VC or VCA ANSI08000012 3 en vsd PICKUP ANSI08000012 V3 EN Figure 141 Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59...

Страница 313: ...p function 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 8 3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 59N 8 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 3U0 IEC10000168 V1 EN 59N 8 3 2 Fun...

Страница 314: ...lock 8 3 4 Signals Table 195 ROV2PTOV 59N Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Table 196 ROV2PTOV 59N Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal f...

Страница 315: ...me multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 OperationStep2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable execution of step 2 Pickup2 1 100 VB 1 45 Voltage start value DT IDMT in of VBase for step 2 t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Definite time delay of step 2 Table 198 ROV2PTOV 59N Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global...

Страница 316: ... The residual voltage is measured continuously and compared with the set values Pickup1 and Pickup2 To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal a hysteresis has been included 8 3 7 2 Time delay 8 3 7 3 Blocking It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 59N partially or completely by binary input signals where BLOCK blocks all outputs BLK1 blocks all pickupand ...

Страница 317: ...residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 59N The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 59N is schematically described in Figure 143 VN is a signal included in the three phase group signal V3P which shall be connected to output AI3P of the SMAI If a connection is made to the 4 input GRPx_N x is equal to instance number 2 to 12 on the SMAI VN is this signal else VN is the vecto...

Страница 318: ...cally at 0 to 2 x Vset Reset time pickup function 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 1 2 xVset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 8 4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 27 8 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 27 8 4 2 Functionality Loss of volta...

Страница 319: ...OLEAN 0 Block of function CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open BLKV BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision Table 202 LOVPTUV 27 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal 8 4 5 Settings Table 203 LOVPTUV 27 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Enable Disable VPG ...

Страница 320: ...7 is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock LOVPTUV 27 operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block Due to undervoltage condition...

Страница 321: ...ses are low for at least 10 s not three 1 1 t tRestore Reset Enable Set Enable 1 Line restored for at least 3 s Latched Enable ANSI08000011 3 e n Original 1 vsd START TRIP CBOPEN BLKU BLOCK ANSI08000011 V3 EN Figure 145 Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 27 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 8 Voltage protection 315 Technical manual ...

Страница 322: ... technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage 0 100 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Reset ratio 105 Pulse timer 0 050 60 000 s 0 5 25 ms Timers 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 25 ms Section 8 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Voltage protection 316 Technical manual ...

Страница 323: ...generation in the network Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81 measures frequency with high accuracy and is used for load shedding systems remedial action schemes gas turbine startup and so on Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore SAPTUF 81 is provided with undervoltage blocking 9 1 3 Function block ANSI09000282 1 en vsd SAPTUF 81 V3P BLOCK TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDMAGN ...

Страница 324: ...scription Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation PUFrequency 35 00 75 00 Hz 0 01 48 80 Frequency set value tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay tRestore 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Restore time delay RestoreFreq 45 00 65 00 Hz 0 01 49 90 Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value 9 1 6 Monitored data Table 210 SAPTUF 81 Monitored data Name Type Val...

Страница 325: ...ults in the power system If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function which is described in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter SAPTUF 81 gets blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting of the global parameter VBase To avoid osci...

Страница 326: ...signal BLOCK blocks all outputs If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked 9 1 7 4 Design The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81 is schematically described in figure 147 Figure 148 Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF 81 9 1 8 Technical data Table 211 SAPTUF 81 Technical data F...

Страница 327: ...ity Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF 81 is applicable in all situations where reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network Close to the generating plant generator governor problems can also cause over frequency SAPTOF 81 measures frequency with high accuracy and is used mainly ...

Страница 328: ...mmon trip signal BFI BOOLEAN General pickup signal BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude 9 2 5 Settings Table 214 SAPTOF 81 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disable Enable PUFrequency 35 00 75 00 Hz 0 01 51 20 Frequency set value tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay 9 2 6 Monitored...

Страница 329: ...equence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter VBase SAPTOF 81 is b...

Страница 330: ...ured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked 9 2 7 4 Design The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81 is schematically described in figure 150 Voltage PICKUP PICKUP TRIP Pickup Trip Output Logic Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset Comparator V IntBlockLevel BLOCK en...

Страница 331: ... 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC df dt SYMBOL N V1 EN 81 9 3 2 Functionality The rate of change frequency protection function SAPFRC 81 gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system SAPFRC 81 measures frequency with high accuracy and can be used for gen...

Страница 332: ...ORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude 9 3 5 Settings Table 219 SAPFRC 81 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation PUFreqGrad 10 00 10 00 Hz s 0 01 0 50 Frequency gradient pick up value the sign defines direction tTrip 0 000 60 000 s 0 0...

Страница 333: ...sed for decreasing frequency that is the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative value and a trip signal has been issued a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq A positive setting of PUFreqGrad sets SAPFRC 81 to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency increases To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal a hysteresi...

Страница 334: ...ncy BLOCK freqNotValid ANSI08000009 V1 EN Figure 153 Schematic design of Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 81 9 3 7 Technical data Table 220 SAPFRC 81 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value pickup function 10 00 10 00 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Operate value restore enable frequency 45 00 65 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Timers 0 000 60 000 s 130 ms Operate time pickup function At 50 Hz 100 m...

Страница 335: ...urrence of open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF 87 compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer A detection of a difference indicates a...

Страница 336: ...up settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation IMinOp 5 200 IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential pickup in of IBase Table 224 CCSRDIF 87 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup_Block 5 500 IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current in of IBase Table 225 CCSRDIF 8...

Страница 337: ...nabled by setting Operation Enabled The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND gate resets This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element s operate fo...

Страница 338: ...data Table 226 CCSRDIF 87 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current 5 200 of In 10 0 of In at I In 10 0 of I at I In Block current 5 500 of In 5 0 of In at I In 5 0 of I at I In 10 2 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF 10 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF Sectio...

Страница 339: ...works It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities a high value of zero sequence voltage 3V0 without the presence of the zero sequence current 3I0 For better adaptation to system requirements an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function The selection of different operation mo...

Страница 340: ...V BOOLEAN General pickup 3PH BOOLEAN Three phase pickup DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases 10 2 5 Settings Table 229 SDDRFUF Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Disable Enable Operation OpModeSel Disabled V2I2 V0I0 V0I0 OR V2I2 V0I0 AND V2I2 OptimZsNs V0I...

Страница 341: ... of seal in phase voltage in of VBase IDLDPU 1 100 IB 1 5 Pickup for phase current detection in of IBase for dead line detection VDLDPU 1 100 VB 1 60 Pickup for phase voltage detection in of VBase for dead line detection Table 230 SDDRFUF Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 10 2 6 Monitored ...

Страница 342: ...nable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0PU The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2PU A drop ...

Страница 343: ...t and delta voltage detection A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 159 The calculation of the change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and phase angle changes The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DIPU and DVPU and the algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a suff...

Страница 344: ...o reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection If the current on the protected line is low a voltage drop in the system not caused by fuse failure is not necessarily followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase while the circuit breaker is closed A fault occurs with an open circuit breaker ...

Страница 345: ...e logic as for phase 1 IC VC a b a b VA IA a b a b 50P AND AND 52A OR OR AND a b a b VB IB a b a b AND AND OR OR AND a b a b VC IC a b a b AND AND OR OR AND OR FuseFailDetDVDI DVDI Detection ANSI10000034 2 en vsd 0 20 ms 0 1 5 cycle ANSI10000034 V2 EN Figure 159 Simplified logic diagram for DV DI detection part 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 10 Secondary system supervision 339 Technical manual ...

Страница 346: ...ne Detection ANSI0000035 1 en vsd ANSI0000035 V1 EN Figure 160 Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part 10 2 7 4 Main logic A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 161 The fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to Enabled or Disabled For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an ...

Страница 347: ...ree phase voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output signal 3PH will also be activated The signals 3PH BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED At start up of the IED due t...

Страница 348: ...al binary input to the N C auxiliary contact of the line disconnector The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open The impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection Section 10 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Secondary system sup...

Страница 349: ...2I2 V0I0 V2I2 OptimZsNs AND FuseFailDetNegSeq OR AND AND CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq a b a b OR AND AND AND FuseFailDetDVDI AND OpDVDI Enabled DeadLineDet1Ph OR OR OR OR AND VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq OR AllCurrLow intBlock Fuse failure detection Main logic OR ANSI10000041 2 en vsd 150 ms 0 200 ms 0 0 5 sec 0 60 sec 0 5 sec ANSI10000041 V2 EN 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 10 Secondary system supervision 343 T...

Страница 350: ... of IBase 1 0 of In 10 3 Breaker close trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR 10 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Breaker close trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR 10 3 2 Functionality The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control circuit of the circuit breaker The trip circuit supervis...

Страница 351: ...ble 235 TCSSCBR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation Disabled Enabled tDelay 0 020 300 000 s 0 001 3 000 Operate time delay 10 3 6 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of trip circuit supervision ...

Страница 352: ...on circuits in the IED the output contacts are provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors The breakdown voltage of these suppressors is 400 20 V DC Timer The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer 10 3 7 Technical data Table 236 TCSSCBR Technical data Function Range or value Accurac...

Страница 353: ...th at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely SESRSYN 25 function includes a built in voltage selection scheme for double bus and breaker and a half or ring busbar arrangements Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided The main pur...

Страница 354: ... VLine MODEAEN MODEMEN ANSI08000219_2_en vsd ANSI08000219 V2 EN Figure 164 SESRSYN 25 function block 11 1 4 Signals Table 237 SESRSYN 25 Input signals Name Type Default Description V3PB1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1 busbar 1 V3PB2 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1 busbar 2 V3PL1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to ground voltage inp...

Страница 355: ...K VL1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure VL2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK VL2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energ...

Страница 356: ...OOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing VDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p u of set voltage base value FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle Vbus REAL Bus voltage VLine REAL Line voltage MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing 11 1 5 Settings Table 239...

Страница 357: ... 0 01 0 15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck in p u of set voltage base value FreqDiffA 0 003 1 000 Hz 0 001 0 010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto FreqDiffM 0 003 1 000 Hz 0 001 0 010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual PhaseDiffA 5 0 90 0 Deg 1 0 25 0 Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto PhaseDiffM 5 0 90 0 Deg 1 0 25 0 Phase angle...

Страница 358: ...L1 Select phase for busbar2 SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1L2 Phase L2L3 Phase L3L1 Positive sequence Phase L1 Select phase for line1 SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1L2 Phase L2L3 Phase L3L1 Positive sequence Phase L1 Select phase for line2 11 1 6 Monitored data Table 241 SESRSYN 25 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VDIFFME REAL Calculated di...

Страница 359: ...ing auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors For breaker and a half circuit breaker arrangements correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus line disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the input and outputs and the settings with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document For application ...

Страница 360: ...nism check function respectively Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions A number of outputs are availabl...

Страница 361: ...V2 EN Figure 165 Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function 11 1 7 3 Synchronizing When the function is set to OperationSynch Enabled the measuring will be performed The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with internally preset values that are set to be 80 of the set UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and GlbBaseSelLine which is a supervision that the volta...

Страница 362: ...set tMaxSynch time This prevents that the function is by mistake maintained in operation for a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output ...

Страница 363: ...rameter Setting tool The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN The modes are 0 OFF 1 DLLB 2 DBLL and 3 Both The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN 25 function respective block of the Energizing check function TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output 11 1 7 5 ...

Страница 364: ...ositions 11 1 7 7 Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP BUS1_CL for Bus 1 and BUS2_OP BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used All other com...

Страница 365: ...for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN Synchronism Synchronizing and Energizing check function For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to ...

Страница 366: ...elected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker is closed The function also checks the fuse failure signals for bus 1 bus 2 line 1 and line 2 If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an outpu...

Страница 367: ...E2_OP AND AND L2SEL OR AND B2SEL AND AND AND en05000780_2_ansi vsd OR OR line2Voltage bus2Voltage line1Voltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK ANSI05000780 V2 EN Figure 168 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker and a half arrangement 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 361 Technical manual ...

Страница 368: ... AND BUS2_CL BUS2_OP LINE2_CL LINE2_OP bus2Voltage L2SEL AND AND B2SEL line2Voltage OR en05000781_2_ansi vsd OR OR NOT NOT busVoltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK ANSI05000781 V2 EN Figure 169 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker and a half arrangement Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 362 Technical manual ...

Страница 369: ...inimum limit for synchronizing 0 003 0 250 Hz 2 0 mHz Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing 0 050 0 500 Hz 2 0 mHz Maximum allowed frequency rate of change 0 000 0 500 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Closing time of the breaker 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 25 ms Breaker closing pulse duration 0 050 60 000 s 0 5 25 ms tMaxSynch which resets synchronizing function if no close has been made before set time 0 00...

Страница 370: ... are provided for multi breaker arrangements A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient The autoreclosing function is configured to co operate with the synchronism check function 11 2 3 Function block ANSI08000086 1 en vsd SMBRREC 79 ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT RI TRSOTF ZONESTEP THOLHOLD CBREADY 52A SYNC WA...

Страница 371: ...ulfilled for 3Ph closing attempts WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master in Multi breaker arrangements RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters Table 244 SMBRREC 79 Output signals Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN Wait for master in Multi breaker arrangements SETON BOOLEAN AR operation is switched on READY BOOLEAN Indicates that AR is ready for a new sequence ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progres...

Страница 372: ...00 00 s 0 01 60 00 Duration of the reset time tSync 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Maximum wait time for synchronism check OK tTrip 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Maximum trip pulse duration tCBClosedMin 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Minimum time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows tUnsucCl 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful Successful Priority None Low High ...

Страница 373: ... s AR 11 2 6 Operation principle 11 2 6 1 Auto reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control With the setting Operation Enabled the function is activated while with the setting Operation Disabled the function is deactivated With the setting Operation External ctrl the activation deactiva...

Страница 374: ...the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 171 The following should be considered Setting Operation can be set to Disabled External ctrl or Enabled External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF communication commands to the same inputs and so on SMBRREC 79 is normally started by tripping It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a gen...

Страница 375: ...g sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT Reclosing checks and the reset timer When dead time has elapsed during the auto reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued To achieve this signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met In three phase reclosing a synchronizing and or energizing check c...

Страница 376: ...CB is prepared for a Close Open sequence The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval tSync If it is not or if other conditions are not met the reclosing is interrupted and blocked The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command after which the reclosing function resets Should a new trip occur during this time it is treated as a cont...

Страница 377: ... 3PT2 3PT3 OR Shot 0 pickup initiate Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 3PT4 3PT5 3PT1TO SMBRREC State Control 0 0 tSync 0 0 tReset 0 0 t1 3Ph 0 tInhibit 0 ANSI08000244 V2 EN Figure 172 Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers Pulsing of the CB closing command The duration of the pulse is fixed 200 ms See figure 173 When a reclosing command is issued the appropriate reclosing operation counter is increm...

Страница 378: ...ng on the setting for the number of reclosing shots further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended After the reset time has elapsed the auto reclosing function resets but the CB remains open The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing Because of this the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and...

Страница 379: ...ammed to proceed to the following reclosing shots if selected even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions but the breaker is still not closed This is done by setting parameter AutoCont Enabled and to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate AND AND AND OR OR RI 52a initiate en05000787_ansi vsd CLOSECMD S R Q CBClosed 0 0 tAutoContWait AN...

Страница 380: ... CB auxiliary contact of type NC normally closed 52b to inputs 52a and RI When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function subject to the usual checks Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions which shall prevent reclosing to the input...

Страница 381: ...re AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle 0 00 6000 00 s CB check time before unsuccessful 0 00 6000 00 s Wait for master release 0 00 6000 00 s Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot 0 000 60 000 s 11 3 Autorecloser for 1 3 phase operation STBRREC 79 11 3 1 Identification Function Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number A...

Страница 382: ... RSTCOUNT BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PREP3P CLOSECMD WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR ANSI10000218 1 en vsd ANSI10000218 V1 EN Figure 177 STBRREC 79 function block 11 3 4 Signals Table 248 STBRREC 79 Input signals Name Type Default Description ON BOOLEAN 0 Enables AR when Operation ExternalCtrl OFF BOOLEAN 0 D...

Страница 383: ...g sequence in progress SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful signal resets after the reclaim time INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress activated during open reset 1PT1 BOOLEAN Single phase reclosing in progress shot 1 3PT1 BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing in progress shot 1 3PT2 BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing in progress shot 2 3PT3 ...

Страница 384: ...hronism check OK tTrip 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Maximum trip pulse duration tCBClosedMin 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Minimum time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows tUnsucCl 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful Successful Priority None Low High None Priority selection between adjacent terminals None Low High tWaitForMaster 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 60 0...

Страница 385: ... Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing ZoneSeqCoord Disabled Enabled Disabled Coordination of down stream devices to local protection unit s AR 11 3 6 Operation principle 11 3 6 1 Auto reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control With the setting Operation Enabled the function is activated...

Страница 386: ...rotection fuctions that should not start autoreclosing to input INHIBIT The logic to enable or disable STBRREC 79 and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 178 The following should be considered Setting Operation can be set to Disabled External ctrl or Enabled External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF STBRREC 79 is normally started by tr...

Страница 387: ...GIC reclosing programs 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 OR Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 3PT4 3PT5 3PT1TO STBRREC 79 State Control 1PT1 OR 1PT1 TR3P initiate pickup PREP3P 0 0 t1 3Ph 0 0 tSync 0 0 tReset 0 tInhibit 0 ANSI10000256 V3 EN Figure 178 Auto reclosing Disabled Enabled and start 11 3 6 3 Auto reclosing mode selection The Auto reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode 3 phase 0 1 3ph 1 1ph ...

Страница 388: ...lost In such a case there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two ends of the line A longer auto reclosing open time can then be useful This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 Disabled and the input PLCLOST 11 3 6 5 Long trip signal In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing The user can set a maximum trip pul...

Страница 389: ...t breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType OCO CB ready for an Open Close Open sequence this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure The Open Close Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close Ope...

Страница 390: ...Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 3PT4 3PT5 3PT1TO STBRREC 79 State Control 1PT1 OR 1PT1 TR3P initiate pickup PREP3P 0 0 t1 3Ph 0 0 tSync 0 0 tReset 0 tInhibit 0 ANSI10000257 V2 EN Figure 180 Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers 11 3 6 7 Pulsing of the CB closing command The duration of the pulse is fixed 200 ms See figure 181 When a reclosing command is issued the appropriate reclosing oper...

Страница 391: ...longer be started Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended After the reset time has elapsed the auto reclosing function resets but the CB remains open The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing Because of this the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle Normally the signal UNSUCCL ap...

Страница 392: ...continuation of the reclosing sequence The auto reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots if selected even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions but the breaker is still not closed This is done by setting parameter AutoCont Enabled and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate Secti...

Страница 393: ...ng parameter StartByCBOpen Enabled One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations Typically one also set CBAuxContType NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC normally closed to inputs 52a and RI When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function subject to the usual checks The...

Страница 394: ...0000262 1 en vsd AND AND AND AND 1 100 ms 100 ms StartByCBOpen Enabled RI RI_HS PICKUP NOT ANSI10000262 V1 EN Figure 184 Pulsing of the start inputs Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 388 Technical manual ...

Страница 395: ...ime before unsuccessful 0 00 6000 00 s Wait for master release 0 00 6000 00 s Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot 0 000 60 000 s 11 4 Apparatus control 11 4 1 Functionality The apparatus control function APC8 for up to 8 apparatuses is used for control and supervision of circuit breakers disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay Permission to operate is given after...

Страница 396: ...switching operation and positions 11 4 2 Switch controller SCSWI 11 4 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Switch controller SCSWI 11 4 2 2 Functionality The Switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses The Switch controller may handle ...

Страница 397: ...ing is permitted by the synchronism check EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group signal from XCBR XSWI Table 254 SCSWI Output signals Name Type Description EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute Open command EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute Close command SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the synchronizing function PO...

Страница 398: ...R 11 4 3 1 Signals Table 256 SXCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local Remote switch indication from switchyard OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the c...

Страница 399: ...NTEGER Operation counter value L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command 11 4 3 2 Settings Table 258 SXCBR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tStartMove 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command tIntermediate 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Allowed time for intermediate position AdaptivePulse Not...

Страница 400: ...CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I O RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI Table 260 SXSWI Output signals Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the funct...

Страница 401: ...dBreak 2 Disconnector 3 GroundSw 4 HighSpeedGroundSw SuppressMidPos Disabled Enabled Enabled Mid position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate 11 4 5 Bay control QCBAY 11 4 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Bay control QCBAY 11 4 5 2 Functionality The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local ...

Страница 402: ...ion UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed 11 4 5 5 Settings Table 264 QCBAY Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description AllPSTOValid Priority No priority Priority Priority of originators 11 4 6 Local remote LOCREM 11 4 6 1 Identification F...

Страница 403: ...RLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control Table 266 LOCREM Output signals Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid 11 4 6 5 Settings Table 267 LOCREM Non group settings basic Nam...

Страница 404: ...ls are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs 11 4 7 3 Function block IEC09000074_1_en vsd LOCREMCTRL PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12 HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12 IEC09000074 V1 EN Figure 188 LOCREMCTRL function block 11 4 7 4 Signals T...

Страница 405: ...MI input HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask outp...

Страница 406: ...ELECT5 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4 SELECT6 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4 SELECT7 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4 SELECT8 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 8 SELECT9 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 8 SELECT10 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 10 SELECT11 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 11 SELECT12 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 12 SELECT13 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of...

Страница 407: ...e selection command evaluation and the supervision of position Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable cause attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850 communic...

Страница 408: ... non volatile memory Interaction with synchronism check and synchronizing functions The Switch controller SCSWI works in conjunction with the synchronism check and the synchronizing function SESRSYN 25 It is assumed that the synchronism check function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI The result from the synchronism check function is evaluated during the close execution If...

Страница 409: ...on conditions These timers are explained here The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal that is the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate select tSelect timer execute command t1 t1 tSelect then long operation time in cause is set en05000092 vsd IEC05000092 V1 EN Figure 191 tSele...

Страница 410: ...r tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true If SYNC_OK true at the time the execute command signal is received the timer tSynchrocheck will not start The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled execute command SY_INPRO SYNC_OK t2 tSynchronizing then blocked b...

Страница 411: ...ch means that the function is a vendor specific logical node The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate PSTO and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example switch control functions voltage control functions and measurement functions Local panel switch The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection The switch connected t...

Страница 412: ... Local panel switch positions PSTO value AllPSTOValid setting parameter Possible locations that shall be able to operate 0 Off 0 Not possible to operate 1 Local 1 Priority Local Panel 1 Local 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any priority 2 Remote 2 Priority Remote level 2 Remote 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any priority 3 Faulty 3 Not possible to operate Blockings The blo...

Страница 413: ...ction block control the output PSTO Permitted Source To Operate on Bay control QCBAY LOCREMCTRL PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12 HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12 QCBAY LR_ OFF LR_ LOC LR_ REM LR_ VALID BL_ UPD BL_ CMD PSTO UPD_ BLKD CMD_ BLKD LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL OFF LOCAL...

Страница 414: ...tion and status of any breaker or switch at any given time 11 5 2 Logical node for interlocking SCILO 3 11 5 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Logical node for interlocking SCILO 3 11 5 2 2 Functionality The Logical node for interlocking SCILO 3 function is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking...

Страница 415: ...the interlocking logic The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI One instance per switching device is needed OPEN_EN POSOPEN POSCLOSE EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE CLOSE_EN SCILO en04000525_ansi vsd OR OR XOR AND AND AND AND NOT ANSI04000525 V1 EN Figure 196 SCILO 3 function logic diagram 11 5 2 5 Signals Table 274 SCILO 3 Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN ...

Страница 416: ...g for busbar grounding switch BB_ES 3 11 5 3 2 Functionality The interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES 3 function is used for one busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 197 89G en04000504 vsd ANSI04000504 V1 EN Figure 197 Switchyard layout BB_ES 3 11 5 3 3 Function block ANSI09000071 1 en vsd BB_ES 3 89G_OP 89G_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB 89GREL 89GITL BBGSOPTR B...

Страница 417: ...all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing all disconnectors on this busbar part Table 277 BB_ES 3 Output signals Name Type Description 89GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is allowed 89GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is not allowed BBGSOPTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in open position BBGSCLTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is ...

Страница 418: ...r bus section breaker A1A2_BS 3 function is used for one bus section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 199 The function can be used for different busbars which includes a bus section circuit breaker WA1 A1 289 489G 189 389G WA2 A2 en04000516_ansi vsd 289G 189G A1A2_BS 152 ANSI04000516 V1 EN Figure 199 Switchyard layout A1A2_BS 3 Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 412 T...

Страница 419: ..._OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_89G 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 389GREL 389GITL 489GREL 489GITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR VPS1S2TR VP189TR VP289TR ANSI09000066 V1 EN Figure 200 A1A2_BS 3 function block 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 413 Technical manual ...

Страница 420: ...189 VP152 A1A2_BS VP189 189_OP 152O_EX1 VP289 289_OP 152O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 152O_EX3 152CLITL 152CLREL VP189 VP289 189ITL 189REL VP152 VP389G VP489G VPS1189G 152_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP S1189G_OP VP389G VPS1189G 389G_CL S1189G_CL EXDU_89G EXDU_89G 189_EX1 189_EX2 NOT NOT AND AND AND AND AND AND OR NOT OR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR ANSI04000542 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 414 ...

Страница 421: ...ption 152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position 152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position 189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position 189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position 289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position 289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position 389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position 389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position 489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position 489G_CL BOO...

Страница 422: ...9 Table 279 A1A2_BS 3 Output signals Name Type Description 152OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed 152OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed 152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed 152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed 189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed 189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed 289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed 289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of ...

Страница 423: ... 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for bus section disconnector A1A2_DC 3 11 5 5 2 Functionality The interlocking for bus section disconnector A1A2_DC 3 function is used for one bus section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 201 A1A2_DC 3 function can be used for different busba...

Страница 424: ...unction block 11 5 5 4 Logic diagram 89_OP 89_CL S1189G_CL en04000544_ansi vsd XOR XOR XOR VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR S1189G_OP S2289G_OP S2289G_CL VPS1189G VPS2289G 89OPITL 89OPREL VPS1189G VPS2289G VPS1_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_89G EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1189 VPS2289G VPS2_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_89G EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1189G VPS2289G S1189G_CL S2289G_CL EXDU_89G QBOP_EX3 A1A2...

Страница 425: ...tion 2 are in open position VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays containing grounding switches QC1 or QC2 EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays with disconnectors connected to sections 1 and 2 089C_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External c...

Страница 426: ...have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 11 5 6 Interlocking for bus coupler bay ABC_BC 3 11 5 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for bus coupler bay ABC_BC 3 11 5 6 2 Functionality The interlocking for bus coupler bay ABC_BC 3 function is used for a bus co...

Страница 427: ...9 2089 289G en04000514_ansi vsd 152 ANSI04000514 V1 EN Figure 203 Switchyard layout ABC_BC 3 The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer bus WA7 C 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 421 Technical manual ...

Страница 428: ...89_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 2089_EX1 2089_EX2 789_EX1 789_EX2 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 2089REL 2089ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 22089OTR 22089CTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VP189TR V22089TR VP789TR VP1289TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR ANSI090000...

Страница 429: ...LITL en04000533_ansi vsd 789_CL VP7189G VP2189G VP1189G VP289G VP189G VP289 VP789 VP2089 VP189 VP152 ABC_BC NOT NOT AND AND AND OR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR ANSI04000533 V1 EN VP152 VP189G VP289 VP289G 152_OP VP1189G 289_OP 289G_OP VP289 189_EX1 189G_OP EXDU_89G 1189G_OP VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC VP189G 189_EX2 VP1189G BC_12_CL 289_CL 189G_CL 189_EX3 EXDU_89G 1189G_CL 189ITL en04000534_an...

Страница 430: ...535 V1 EN VP152 VP189G VP2089 VP289G 152_OP VP7189G 2089_OP 289G_OP VP289G 789_EX1 189G_OP EXDU_89G 7189G_OP VP7189G EXDU_89G VP152 789_EX2 VP789 7189G_CL 289G_CL VP189G 2089_EX1 EXDU_89G 2189G_OP 289G_OP 189G_OP 789_OP 152_OP VP2189G VP289G VP289G VP2189G EXDU_89G 2189G_CL 289G_CL 2089_EX2 2089REL 2089ITL en04000536_ansi vsd 789REL 789ITL NOT NOT AND AND AND AND OR OR ANSI04000536 V1 EN Section 1...

Страница 431: ...ND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT ANSI04000537 V1 EN 11 5 6 5 Signals Table 282 ABC_BC 3 Input signals Name Type Default Description 152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position 152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position 189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position 189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position 289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position 289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed...

Страница 432: ...pparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are valid EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing grounding switches EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay connected to bus1 and bus2 EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay 152O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152 152O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152...

Страница 433: ... BOOLEAN 189 is in open position 189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position 22089OTR BOOLEAN 289 and 2089 are in open position 22089CTR BOOLEAN 289 or 2089 or both are not in open position 789OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position 789CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position 1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position 1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No...

Страница 434: ...The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 11 5 7 Interlocking for breaker and a half diameter BH 3 11 5 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for 1 1 2 breaker diameter BH_CONN 3 Interlocking for 1 1 2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A 3 Interloc...

Страница 435: ...4000513 V1 EN Figure 205 Switchyard layout breaker and a half Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined BH_LINE_A 3 and BH_LINE_B 3 are the connections from a line to a busbar BH_CONN 3 is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 429 Technical manual ...

Страница 436: ...L 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1389G_OP 1389G_CL 2389G_OP 2389G_CL 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 6289REL 6289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL ANSI09000072 V1 EN Figure 206 BH_CONN 3 function block Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 430 Technical manual ...

Страница 437: ...9G_OP C289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7 152CLREL 152CLITL 689REL 689ITL 189REL 189ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL 989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR ANSI09000073 V1 EN Figure 207 BH_LINE_A 3 function block 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 431 Techni...

Страница 438: ...89G_OP C289G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7 152CLREL 152CLITL 689REL 689ITL 289REL 289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL 989GREL 989GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR ANSI09000081 V1 EN Figure 208 BH_LINE_B function block Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 432 Technic...

Страница 439: ...VP189G VP289G VP2389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2389G_OP 289G_CL 2389G_CL 6289_EX2 6289_EX1 VP289G VP2389G 152CLREL 61891ITL 6189REL VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1389G_OP 189G_CL 1389G_CL 6189_EX2 6189_EX1 VP189G VP1389G VP6289 189GITL 189GREL 289GITL 289GREL VP6189 VP6289 6189_OP 6289_OP XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND XOR AND OR NOT NOT AND AND OR NOT AND AND NOT NOT ANSI04000560 V1 E...

Страница 440: ...P989G VP689 VP189 VP152 BH_LINE_A C289G_OP C289G_CL C6189_OP VPC289G VPC6189 OR VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL 689_EX2 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VP1189G VPVOLT 1189G_OP C6189_CL VOLT_ON 152CLITL 152CLREL VP189 VP689 VP989 AND NOT NOT AND AND XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR ANSI04000554 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UU...

Страница 441: ...P1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX2 VP189 VP689 189_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6189 689_OP 989_OP C6189_OP NOT AND OR NOT NOT NOT NOT AND OR AND AND AND AND OR ANSI04000555 V1 EN 989_EX4 C6189_OP C152_OP en04000556_ansi vsd 989GITL 989GREL C189G_OP C289G_OP 989_EX5 VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF 989G_OP 389G_OP 989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL 989_EX7 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR 189_OP 189_CL VP...

Страница 442: ...89 VP989G VP689 VP289 VP152 BH_LINE_B C289G_OP C289G_CL C6289_OP VPC289G VPC6289 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL 689_EX2 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VP2189G VPVOLT 2189G_OP C6289_CL VOLT_ON 152CLITL 152CLREL VP289 VP689 VP989 XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR OR AND AND NOT NOT AND ANSI04000557 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UU...

Страница 443: ...XDU_89G 289_EX1 VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX2 VP289 VP689 289_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6289 689_OP 989_OP C6289_OP OR OR OR NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT ANSI04000558 V1 EN 989_EX4 C6289_OP C152_OP en04000559_ansi vsd 989GITL 989GREL C189G_OP C289G_OP 989_EX5 VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF 989G_OP 389G_OP 989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL 989_EX7 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR 289_OP 289_CL VP...

Страница 444: ... is in closed position 6189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189 6189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189 6289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289 6289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289 Table 285 BH_LINE_A 3 Input signals Name Type Default Description 152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position 152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position...

Страница 445: ...voltage on line and not VT fuse failure VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT fuse failure EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing grounding switch QC11 689_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689 689_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689 189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189 189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External co...

Страница 446: ...89G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position C289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position C289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position 2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position 2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT ...

Страница 447: ...89G is not allowed Table 288 BH_LINE_A 3 Output signals Name Type Description 152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed 152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed 689REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed 689ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed 189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed 189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed 189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed 189GITL...

Страница 448: ... of 189G is not allowed 289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed 289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed 389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed 389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed 989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed 989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed 989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed 989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed 289O...

Страница 449: ...usbar arrangement according to figure 209 WA1 A WA2 B 189 189G 289G 989G 6189 989 289 489G 589G 389G 6289 DB_BUS_B DB_LINE DB_BUS_A en04000518_ansi vsd 252 152 ANSI04000518 V1 EN Figure 209 Switchyard layout double circuit breaker Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined DB_BUS_A 3 handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the disconn...

Страница 450: ...ITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR ANSI09000077 V1 EN Figure 210 DB_BUS_A 3 function block ANSI09000078 1 en vsd DB_BUS_B 3 252_OP 252_CL 289_OP 289_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 252CLREL 252CLITL 6289REL 6289ITL 289REL 289ITL 489GREL 489GITL 589GREL 589GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR ANSI09000078 V1 EN Figure ...

Страница 451: ...6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989REL 989ITL 389GREL 389GITL 989GREL 989GITL ASNI09000082 V1 EN Figure 212 DB_LINE 3 function block 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 445 Technical manual ...

Страница 452: ...G_OP VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G EXDU_89G 189_EX1 189_EX2 152CLREL 6189ITL 6189REL VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 289G_CL 389G_CL 6189_EX2 6189_EX1 VP289G VP389G VP189 NOT AND OR AND AND AND AND OR NOT NOT XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR ANSI04000547 V1 EN 6189_OP en04000548_ansi vsd VP6189 VP189 189GREL 189GITL 189_OP 189_OP 189_CL 289GREL 289GITL VP189 189OPTR 189...

Страница 453: ...VP2189G 489G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G EXDU_89G 289_EX1 289_EX2 252CLREL 6289ITL 6289REL VP252 VP489G VP589G VP389G 252_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 389G_OP 589G_CL 389G_CL 6289_EX2 6289_EX1 VP589G VP389G VP289 XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND AND AND AND AND NOT NOT NOT OR OR ANSI04000552 V1 EN 6289_OP en04000553_ansi vsd VP6289 VP289 489GREL 489GITL 289_OP 289_OP 289_CL 589GREL 589GITL VP289 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR...

Страница 454: ...9G_CL VP389G VP989 VP589G VP489G VP6289 VP289G VP189G VP6189 VP252 VP152 DB_LINE 989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP989G VPVOLT VP152 VP252 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP489G VP589G VP989G 152_OP 252_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 989G_OP 989_EX1 XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND OR NOT AND ANSI04000549 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 448 Technical manual ...

Страница 455: ...AND AND AND ANSI04000550 V1 EN 389GITL 389GREL en04000551_ansi vsd VP6289 VP989 6189_OP 6289_OP 989_OP VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF VP6189 989GITL 989GREL AND AND NOT NOT ANSI04000551 V1 EN 11 5 8 5 Signals Table 290 DB_BUS_A 3 Input signals Name Type Default Description 152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position 152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position 189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position 189...

Страница 456: ...89_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189 189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189 Table 291 DB_BUS_B 3 Input signals Name Type Default Description 252_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position 252_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position 289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position 289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position 6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position 6289_CL BOOLEAN...

Страница 457: ... BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position 289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position 6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position 6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position 489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position 489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position 589G_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position 589G_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position 989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position 989_CL BOOLEAN...

Страница 458: ...ng of 289G is not allowed 189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position 189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid open or closed Table 294 DB_BUS_B 3 Output signals Name Type Description 252CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is allowed 252CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is not allowed 6289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed 6289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is n...

Страница 459: ...tion and Control IED Manager PCM600 11 5 9 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE 3 11 5 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE 3 11 5 9 2 Functionality The interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE 3 function is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar ac...

Страница 460: ... B WA7 C 789 en04000478_ansi vsd 152 ANSI04000478 V1 EN Figure 213 Switchyard layout ABC_LINE 3 The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer bus WA7 C Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 454 Technical manual ...

Страница 461: ..._ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_89G EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC 989_EX1 989_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 789_EX1 789_EX2 789_EX3 789_EX4 152CLREL 152CLITL 989REL 989ITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP789TR VP1289TR ANSI09000070 V1 E...

Страница 462: ... 289_CL VP2189G VP1189G VP989G VP289G VP189G VP789 VP289 VP189 VP989 VP152 ABC_LINE 7189G_OP 7189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP7189G VPVOLT VP152 VP189G VP289G VP989G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 989G_OP 989_EX1 VP289G VP989G 289G_CL 989G_CL 989_EX2 152CLITL 152CLREL XOR AND AND OR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR NOT AND NOT ANSI04000527 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 456 Technical ma...

Страница 463: ...9_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP289 VP_BC_12 289_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 189_EX2 VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189EX3 en04000528_ansi vsd NOT AND AND OR AND ANSI04000528 V1 EN 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 457 Technical manual ...

Страница 464: ...9_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP189 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 289_EX2 VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX3 en04000529_ansi vsd NOT AND OR AND AND ANSI04000529 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 458 Technical manual ...

Страница 465: ...P BC_27_OP EXDU_BC 789_EX1 VP152 VP189 VP989G VP989 VP7189G VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 152_CL 189_CL 989G_OP 989_CL 7189G_OP EXDU_89G BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC 789_EX2 789REL 789ITL en04000530_ansi vsd NOT OR AND AND ANSI04000530 V1 EN 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 459 Technical manual ...

Страница 466: ... EXDU_BC VP989G EXDU_BPB VP7189G 289_OP 189_OP VP989 VP289 VP189 789_EX4 EXDU_89G 7189G_CL 989G_CL 989_OP VP789 989_OP 789_OP VPVOLT VP989 VOLT_OFF 189GITL 189GREL 289GREL 289GITL 989GREL 989GITL en04000531_ansi vsd OR AND AND AND AND NOT NOT NOT ANSI04000531 V1 EN Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 460 Technical manual ...

Страница 467: ...89_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position 189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position 189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position 289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position 289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position 789_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position 789_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position 189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position 189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position 289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 ...

Страница 468: ...OLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT fuse failure VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT fuse failure VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of bus coupler apparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are valid VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN ...

Страница 469: ... is not allowed 289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed 289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed 789REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed 789ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed 189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed 189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed 289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed 289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed 989GREL BOOLEAN ...

Страница 470: ...ication Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO 3 11 5 10 2 Functionality The interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO 3 function is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 215 The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit brea...

Страница 471: ...WA2 B 389G 489G 489 389 252 and 489G are not used in this interlocking AB_TRAFO en04000515_ansi vsd 252 152 ANSI04000515 V1 EN Figure 215 Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO 3 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 465 Technical manual ...

Страница 472: ...L 2189G_OP 2189G_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_BC 152_EX1 152_EX2 152_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP1289TR ANSI09000068 V1 EN Figure 216 AB_TRAFO 3 function block Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 466 Technical manual ...

Страница 473: ...9 1189G_CL 1189G_OP VP189G 389G_CL 289G_CL 189G_CL 152_EX3 389G_OP 152_EX2 VP489 VP389 VP289G 152_EX1 152CLITL 152CLREL en04000538_ansi vsd 189G_CL VP2189G VP1189G VP389G VP489 VP389 VP289G VP189G VP289 VP189 VP152 AB_TRAFO AND VP389G OR AND NOT XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR ANSI04000538 V1 EN 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 11 Control 467 Technical manual ...

Страница 474: ...389G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX3 NOT AND OR AND AND ANSI04000539 V1 EN VP152 VP189G VP189 VP289G VP2189G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_OP 2189G_OP 389G_OP 289G_OP 289_EX1 VP_BC_12 BC_12_CL 389G_OP 189_CL EXDU_BC VP389G VP189 VP389G VP289G VP189G 289_EX2 252ITL en04000540_ansi vsd OR AND 252REL VP2189G 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX3 AND AND NOT ANSI04000540 V1 EN Section 11...

Страница 475: ... BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position 189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position 289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position 289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position 389_OP BOOLEAN 0 389 is in open position 389_CL BOOLEAN 0 389 is in closed position 489_OP BOOLEAN 0 489 is in open position 489_CL BOOLEAN 0 489 is in closed position 389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position 389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 38...

Страница 476: ...pe Description 152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed 152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed 189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed 189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed 289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed 289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed 189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed 189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed 289GREL BOOLEAN Switc...

Страница 477: ...nal POSITION consisting of value time and signal status to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme 11 5 11 3 Function block POS_EVAL POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS IEC09000079_1_en vsd IEC09000079 V1 EN Figure 217 POS_EVAL function block 11 5 11 4 Logic diagram POS_EVAL POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS IEC08000469 1 en vsd Position including...

Страница 478: ...control IED The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus The reservation function is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap which arises between position updates This can be done by means of the communication system reserving all HV a...

Страница 479: ...ule External release to add special conditions for release Line voltage to block operation of line grounding switch Output signals to release the HV apparatus The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 218 Interlocking modules in other bays Interlocking module SCILO SCSWI Apparatus control modules SXCBR SCILO SCSWI SXSWI Apparatus control modu...

Страница 480: ...ing switches are always identical Grounding switches on the line feeder end for example rapid grounding switches are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located not with reference to switches on the other side of the line So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules If there is no line voltage supervision within the ba...

Страница 481: ... for double busbars A1A2_BS 3 Bus section disconnector for double busbars A1A2_DC 3 Busbar grounding switch BB_ES 3 Double CB Bay DB_BUS_A 3 DB_LINE 3 DB_BUS_B 3 Breaker and a half diameter BH_LINE_A BH_CONN BH_LINE_B 3 The interlocking conditions can be altered to meet the customer specific requirements by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600 The inputs Qx...

Страница 482: ...wer system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio The logic selector switches eliminate all these problems 11 6 3 Function block IEC09000091_1_en vsd SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 SWPOSN IEC09000091 V1 EN Figure 220 SLGGIO function block 11 6 4 Signals Table 302 SLGGI...

Страница 483: ...N Selector switch position 15 P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16 P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17 P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18 P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19 P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20 P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21 P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22 P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23 P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24 P25 BOOLEA...

Страница 484: ...n the output 4 will be activated When a signal is received on the DOWN input the block will activate the output next to the present activated output in descending order if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input then the output 2 will be activated Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed In case of steady signals in case of U...

Страница 485: ...r Selector mini switch VSGGIO 11 7 2 Functionality The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of applications as a general purpose switch VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram SLD on the local HMI 11 7 3 Function block VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 IEC09000341...

Страница 486: ...ime between select and execute signals tPulse 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Command pulse lenght 11 7 6 Operation principle Selector mini switch VSGGIO function can be used for double purpose in the same way as switch controller SCSWI functions are used for indication on the single line diagram SLD Position is received through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through th...

Страница 487: ... table shows the relationship between IPOS1 IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string that is shown on the SLD The value of the strings are set in PST IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value 0 0 PosUndefined P00 1 0 Position1 P01 0 1 Position2 P10 1 1 PosBadState P11 11 8 IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions DPGGIO 11 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 ident...

Страница 488: ...ble point indication 11 8 5 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 11 8 6 Operation principle Upon receiving the input signals the IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850 8 1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals To be able to get the sig...

Страница 489: ... the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving functionality for example SCSWI In this way simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs without confirmation The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time 11 9 3 Function block SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 IEC09000086_1_en vsd IEC09000086 V1 EN Figure 222 SPC8GGIO func...

Страница 490: ...t 2 Pulse Time Latched3 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 3 tPulse3 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Output 3 Pulse Time Latched4 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 4 tPulse4 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Output 4 Pulse Time Latched5 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 5 tPulse5 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Output 5 Pulse Tim...

Страница 491: ...ator place selector for all control functions Although PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places only REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function 11 10 Automation bits AUTOBITS 11 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number AutomationBits command function for DNP3 AUTOBITS 11 10 2 Functionality The...

Страница 492: ...7 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 IEC09000030 V1 EN Figure 223 AUTOBITS function block 11 10 4 Signals Table 314 AUTOBITS Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection Table 315 AUTOBITS Output signals Name Type Description CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1 CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2 CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command...

Страница 493: ...ut bit 18 CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19 CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20 CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21 CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22 CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23 CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24 CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25 CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26 CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27 CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28 CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out b...

Страница 494: ...DBITxx outputs will be set to 0 The BLOCK acts like an overriding the function still receives data from the DNP3 master Upon deactivation of BLOCK all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again momentarily For AUTOBITS the PSTO input determines the operator place The command can be written to the block while in Remote If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs F...

Страница 495: ... Table 319 I103CMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 11 12 IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IEDCMD 11 12 1 Functionality I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored Pulse length is fixed to 400ms 11 12 2 Function block IEC10000283 1 ...

Страница 496: ...up 3 26 GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26 activate setting group 4 11 12 4 Settings Table 322 I103IEDCMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 255 Function type 1 255 11 13 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 11 13 1 Functionality I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals Th...

Страница 497: ...ommand output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5 OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6 OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7 OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8 11 13 4 Settings Table 325 I103USRCMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 PulseMode Steady Pulsed Pulsed P...

Страница 498: ...tion has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double point command schemes The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON OFF or 2 steady ON OFF outputs The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2 while the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1 If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with comm...

Страница 499: ...position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 11 15 1 Functionality I103POSCMD has double point position indicators that are getting the position value as an integer for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block and sending it over IEC 60870 5 103 1 OPEN 2 CLOSE The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3 However when connected to a switching device these values ...

Страница 500: ...ion BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object 11 15 4 Settings Table 330 I103POSCMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Fucntion type 1 255 InfNo 160 196 4 160 Information number for command output 1 255 Section 11 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Control 494 Techn...

Страница 501: ...ctionality To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults scheme communication logic is provided All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching permissive overreaching blocking delta based blocking unblocking and intertrip are available 12 1 3 Function block ANSI09000004 2 en vsd ZCPSCH 85 I3P V3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD CBOPEN TRIP C...

Страница 502: ... pilot schemes CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching pilot schemes CR BOOLEAN 0 Channel receive input signal from communications apparatus module for pilot communication scheme logic CR_GUARD BOOLEAN 0 Carrier channel guard input signal CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open Table 332 ZCPSCH 85 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by p...

Страница 503: ...B 1 5 Voltage change level in of UB for fault inception detection Delta3I0 0 200 IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in of IB Delta3V0 0 100 VB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in of UB tSecurity 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Table 335 ZCPSCH 85 Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSelector 1 6 1 1 ...

Страница 504: ...n case of external faults the blocking signal CR must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses to prevent a false trip see figure 230 Upon detection of a forward fault the blocking of the carrier send signal is achieved by activating the input BLKCS The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK block of trip by activating the input BLKTR PLTR CRD CR TRIP AND en05000...

Страница 505: ... the input signal BLKCS is not activated If it is later detected that it is an internal fault that made the function issue the CS signal the function will assert CHSTOP output and stop the channel send CS output Channels for communication in each direction must be available 12 1 6 3 Permissive underreaching scheme In a permissive underreaching scheme a forward directed underreach measuring element...

Страница 506: ...ing between a trip and guard frequency The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD must be present when no CR trip permission signal is received so that the channel can always be monitored The loss the CR_GUARD signal for a longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal see figure 232 and 233 This enables the unblock permissive scheme to trip when the line fault interrupts ...

Страница 507: ...ication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored It sends a defined 150 ms CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal to the trip logic allowing a forward overreaching trip for 150 ms The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes 200 ms there will not be recurrent signalling 12 1 6 6 Intertrip scheme In the direct i...

Страница 508: ...0 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Security timer for loss of guard signal detection 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Operation mode of unblocking logic Disabled NoRestart Restart 12 2 Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3 phase ZCRWPSCH 85 12 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Current reversal and WEI logic for dist...

Страница 509: ...phase s 12 2 3 Function block ANSI09000007 1 en vsd ZCRWPSCH 85 V3P BLOCK IFWD IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 BLKZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI ECHO ANSI09000007 V1 EN Figure 234 ZCRWPSCH 85 function block 12 2 4 Signals Table 337 ZCRWPSCH 85 Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IFWD BOOLEAN 0 A signal that indica...

Страница 510: ...rRev Disabled Enabled Disabled Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic tPickUpRev 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Pickup time for current reversal logic tDelayRev 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip WEI Disabled Echo Echo Trip Disabled Operating mode of WEI logic tPickUpWEI 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 010 Coordination time for the WEI logic PU27PP 10 90 VB 1 70 Phas...

Страница 511: ...IRVL AND 0 10ms 0 tPickUpRev 0 0 tDelayRev 0 0 tPickUpRev 0 ANSI05000122 V2 EN Figure 235 Simplified logic diagram for current reversal By connecting the output signal IRVL to input BLKCS in the ZCPSCH 85 function the sending of the signal CS from the overreaching zone connected to CSOR in ZCPSCH will be blocked By connecting IRVL to input BLKTR in the ZCPSCH function the TRIP output from the ZCPS...

Страница 512: ...n the IED is usually used for this purpose BLOCK CRL WEIBLK2 ECHO ECHO cont AND BLKZ AND WEIBLK1 OR 0 0 tWEI 0 200ms 0 50ms 200ms 0 ANSI10000260 1 en vsd ANSI10000260 V1 EN Figure 236 Echo of a received signal by the WEI function When an echo function is used in both IEDs should generally be avoided a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics To avoid a continuous lock up of the syste...

Страница 513: ...echnical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operating mode of WEI logic Disabled Echo Echo Trip Detection pickup phase to phase and phase to neutral voltage 10 90 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Reset ratio 105 Operate time for current reversal logic 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Delay time for current reversal 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Coordination time for weak end infeed logic 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms 1MRK 506...

Страница 514: ... from the two ends overlap on the parallel line The weak end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function When activated received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous one or three phase trip The received signal is also echoed back duri...

Страница 515: ...fuse failure function CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker CRL BOOLEAN 0 POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic Table 343 ZCWSPSCH 85 Output signals Name Type Description IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic TRWEI_A BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in phase A TRWEI_B BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in phase B TRWEI_C BOOLEAN Trip of...

Страница 516: ...f the phases When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone see figure 239 ANSI05000122 2 en vsd IREV IFWD IRVL...

Страница 517: ...nctional input An OR combination of all fault detection functions not undervoltage as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose BLOCK CRL WEIBLK2 ECHO ECHO cont AND BLKZ AND WEIBLK1 OR 0 0 tWEI 0 200ms 0 50ms 200ms 0 ANSI10000260 1 en vsd ANSI10000260 V1 EN Figure 240 Echo of a received signal by the WEI function When an echo function is used in both IEDs should generally be avoided ...

Страница 518: ... 12 3 7 Technical data Table 346 ZCWSPSCH 85 Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operating mode of WEI logic Disablee Echo Echo Trip Detection level phase to phase and phase to neutral voltage 10 90 of VBase 0 5 of Vn Reset ratio 105 Operate time for current reversal logic 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Delay time for current reversal 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms Coordination time for weak end i...

Страница 519: ...The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser zone extension or by the loss of load current loss of load acceleration 12 4 3 Function block ZCLCPLAL I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC TRZE TRLL IEC09000005 1 en vsd IEC09000005 V1 EN Figure 242 ZCLCPLAL function block 12 4 4 Signals Table 347 ZCLCPLAL Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal ...

Страница 520: ...turbance in of IBase LossOfLoad Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable Disable operation of Loss of load ZoneExtension Disabled Enabled Disabled Enable Disable operation of Zone extension MinCurr 1 100 IB 1 5 Level taken as current loss due to remote CB trip in of IBase tLowCurr 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Time delay on pick up for MINCURR value tLoadOn 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay on pick up fo...

Страница 521: ...in the overreaching zone range an unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed On the other hand at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone normally zone 1 only the first trip will be instantaneous The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated...

Страница 522: ...0158 1 en vsd AND OR 0 0 tLoadOn ANSI05000158 V1 EN Figure 244 Loss of load acceleration simplified logic diagram Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing 12 4 7 Technical data Table 351 ZCLCPLAL technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate load current LoadCurr 1 100 of IBase 1 0 of In Operate current MinCurr 1 100 of IBase 1 0 of ...

Страница 523: ...logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak end infeed and current reversal included in Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH 85 function 12 5 3 Function block ANSI09000009 1 en vsd ECPSCH 85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD TRIP CS CRL LCG ANSI09000009 V1 EN Figure 245 ECPSCH 85 function block 12 5 4 Signals Ta...

Страница 524: ... 12 5 5 Settings Table 354 ECPSCH 85 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation SchemeType Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Permissive UR Scheme type Mode of Operation tCoord 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 035 Communication scheme channel coordination time tSendMin 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Minim...

Страница 525: ...site line end The time delay tCoord normally 30 40 ms depends on the remote reverse unit operating and communication transmission times and a chosen safety margin One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel carrier frequency is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source impedances the channel can be shared wit...

Страница 526: ...sed in single line applications In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends use common channels only if the ratio Z1S Z0S positive through zero sequence source impedance is about equal at both ends If the ratio is different the impedance measuring and the directional ground fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions which could result in ...

Страница 527: ...ion equipment to locally create a receive signal It is common or suitable to use the function when older less reliable power line carrier PLC communication is used The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD which must always be present even when no CR signal is received The absence of the CR_GUARD signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal see figure ...

Страница 528: ...unication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored It sends a defined 150 ms CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes 200 ms there will not be recurrent signaling 12 5 7 Technical data Table 356 ECPSCH 85 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Disa...

Страница 529: ... connected to common busbars at both terminals overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses To avoid this type of disturbance a fault current reversal logic transient...

Страница 530: ...es current reverasl logic WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage fuse failure function CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open b...

Страница 531: ...parison logic function The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and permissive overreaching schemes during current reversal The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions These functions are not required for the blocking scheme Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional g...

Страница 532: ...d function can be set to send only an echo signal WEI Echo or an echo signal and a trip signal WEI Echo Trip See figure 250 and figure 251 The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element connected to WEIBLK1 via an OR gate See figure 250 If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms the weak end infeed log...

Страница 533: ...p The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms When this time period has elapsed the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period greater than 50 ms This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends 12 6 7 Technical data Table 361 ECRWPSCH 85 technical data Function Range or value Accuracy ...

Страница 534: ...528 ...

Страница 535: ...rcuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a three phase trip pulse of sufficient length as well as all functionality necessary for correct co operation with autoreclosing functions The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for breaker lock out 13 1 3 Function block ANSI09000284 1 en vsd SMPPTRC 94 BLOCK TRINP_...

Страница 536: ...1 0 150 Minimum duration of trip output signal Table 365 SMPPTRC 94 Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TripLockout Disabled Enabled Disabled On Activate output CLLKOUT and trip latch Off Only output AutoLock Disabled Enabled Disabled On Lockout from input SETLKOUT and trip Off Only input 13 1 6 Operation principle The duration of a trip output signal from tripp...

Страница 537: ...he trip input by setting AutoLock to Enabled A Lockout condition will be indicated by activation of the output CLLKOUT If lockout has been activated it can be reset by activating the input RSTLKOUT or via the HMI If TripLockout is set to Enabled an active Lockout will latch the three phase trip output In this way if both AutoLock and TripLockout are set to Enabled the trip will always be three pha...

Страница 538: ...le pulse prolongation to ensure an one or three phase trip pulse of sufficient length as well as all functionality necessary for correct cooperation with autoreclosing and communication logic functions The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and a settable latch for breaker lock out 13 2 3 Function block ANSI10000220 1 en vsd SPTPTRC 94 BLOCK TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRI...

Страница 539: ...LEAN 0 Set circuit breaker lockout RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Reset circuit breaker lockout Table 368 SPTPTRC 94 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single pole TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three pole CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout outpu...

Страница 540: ...OR t tTripMin TRIP Program 3 phase ANSI10000266 1 en vsd ANSI10000266 V1 EN Figure 255 Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip Tripping logic SPTPTRC 94 function for single and three pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this as well as inputs for faulted phase selection The latter inputs enable single and three pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own ...

Страница 541: ...provided which disables single pole tripping forcing all tripping to be three pole See figure 256 ANSI10000267 1 en vsd PS_A loop loop TRINP_3P TR_A OR OR OR AND AND AND OR OR OR AND OR AND OR AND AND 50ms TR_B TR_C TRINP_A TRINP_B PS_B TRINP_C PS_C 1PTRGF 1PTRZ 2 ANSI10000267 V1 EN Figure 256 Phase segregated front logic 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 13 Logic 535 Technical manual ...

Страница 542: ...ph operating mode The expanded SPTPTRC 94 function has three trip outputs TR_A TR_B TR_C besides the trip output TRIP one per phase for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals There are also separate output signals indicating single pole or three pole trip These signals are important for cooperation with the auto rec...

Страница 543: ...s 0 000 60 000 s 0 5 10 ms 13 3 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO 13 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO 13 3 2 Functionality The 12 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function each with 32 inputs are used to route trip signals and other logical output signals to the tripping logics SMPPTRC and SPTPTRC or ...

Страница 544: ...T17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 IEC09000105 V1 EN Figure 259 TMAGGIO function block 13 3 4 Signals Table 372 TMAGGIO Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary inp...

Страница 545: ...nary input 20 INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21 INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22 INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23 INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24 INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25 INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26 INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27 INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28 INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29 INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30 INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31 INPUT32 BOOL...

Страница 546: ... to INPUT16 has logical value 1 the first output signal OUTPUT1 will get logical value 1 2 when any one of second 16 inputs signals INPUT17 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the second output signal OUTPUT2 will get logical value 1 3 when any one of all 32 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the third output signal OUTPUT3 will get logical value 1 By use of the settings ModeOutput1 Mo...

Страница 547: ...d to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts in the IED When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker s the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0 150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils 13 4 Configurable logic blocks 13 4 1 Standard configurable logic blocks 13 4 1 1 Functionality A number of logic...

Страница 548: ...ock has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if the block s output should reset or return to the state it was after a power interruption The SET input has priority if both SET and RESET inputs are operated simultaneously RSMEMORY function block is a flip flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The m...

Страница 549: ...before the interruption or be reset The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input signal RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption or be reset The function al...

Страница 550: ...xpressions with boolean variables The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted Function block OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT IEC09000288 1 en vsd IEC09000288 V1 EN Figure 261 OR function block Signals Table 375 OR Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0...

Страница 551: ... identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Inverter function block INVERTER Function block INVERTER INPUT OUT IEC09000287 1 en vsd IEC09000287 V1 EN Figure 262 INVERTER function block Signals Table 377 INVERTER Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 378 INVERTER Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not ...

Страница 552: ... settable length Function block PULSETIMER INPUT OUT IEC09000291 1 en vsd IEC09000291 V1 EN Figure 263 PULSETIMER function block Signals Table 379 PULSETIMER Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 380 PULSETIMER Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal Settings Table 381 PULSETIMER Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step De...

Страница 553: ...t or not depending on setting Function block GATE INPUT OUT IEC09000295 1 en vsd IEC09000295 V1 EN Figure 264 GATE function block Signals Table 382 GATE Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 383 GATE Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal Settings Table 384 GATE Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Ope...

Страница 554: ...if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same Function block XOR INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000292 1 en vsd IEC09000292 V1 EN Figure 265 XOR function block Signals Table 385 XOR Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 Table 386 XOR Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverte...

Страница 555: ...unction block Signals Table 387 LOOPDELAY Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 388 LOOPDELAY Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal signal is delayed one execution cycle Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 13 4 1 8 Timer function block TIMERSET Identi...

Страница 556: ...IMERSET Status diagram Function block TIMERSET INPUT ON OFF IEC09000290 1 en vsd IEC09000290 V1 EN Figure 268 TIMERSET function block Signals Table 389 TIMERSET Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 390 TIMERSET Output signals Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output signal pick up delayed OFF BOOLEAN Output signal drop out delayed Section 13 1MRK 506 335 UU...

Страница 557: ...lock has four inputs and two outputs Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un connected The output OUT has a default value 0 initially which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong execution order Function block AND INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUT NOUT IEC09000289...

Страница 558: ...t function SRMEMORY is a flip flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if the flip flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset For a Set Reset flip flop SET input has higher priority over RESET input Table 394 Truth table...

Страница 559: ...block RSMEMORY Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Reset set with memory function block RSMEMORY Functionality The Reset set with memory function block RSMEMORY is a flip flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs where one is inverted The ...

Страница 560: ...SMEMORY Input signals Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset Table 400 RSMEMORY Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal Settings Table 401 RSMEMORY Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled Enabled Enabled Operating mode of the memory ...

Страница 561: ...ERSET 10 10 20 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 25 ms for 20 ms cycle time LOOPDELAY 10 10 20 Table 403 Configurable logic Q T Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy 20 ms 100 ms ANDQT 20 100 ORQT 20 100 XORQT 10 30 INVERTERQT 20 100 RSMEMORYQT 10 30 SRMEMORYQT 15 10 PULSETIMERQT 10 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 25 ms for 20 ms cycle time TIMERSETQT 10 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 25 ms for 20 m...

Страница 562: ...ic Boolean integer floating point string types of signals are available 13 5 3 Function block FXDSIGN OFF ON INTZERO INTONE INTALONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF IEC09000037 vsd IEC09000037 V1 EN Figure 272 FXDSIGN function block 13 5 4 Signals Table 404 FXDSIGN Output signals Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on INTZERO INTEGER Integer...

Страница 563: ...nteger value 0 INTONE is an integer number fixed to integer value 1 INTALONE is an integer value FFFF hex REALZERO is a floating point real number fixed to 0 0 value STRNULL is a string fixed to an empty string null value ZEROSMPL is a channel index fixed to 0 value GRP_OFF is a group signal fixed to 0 value 13 6 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I 13 6 1 Identification Function description IEC ...

Страница 564: ...LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 S...

Страница 565: ...ut OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the output at the last value Values of each of the dif...

Страница 566: ...hat is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16I function block 13 7 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI 13 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI 13 7 2 Fun...

Страница 567: ...tion BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Inpu...

Страница 568: ...e output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT The B16IFCVI function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer for example over IEC 61850 If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the log...

Страница 569: ...he sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx where 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16IFCVI function block 13 8 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A 13 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Integer to boolean 16 ...

Страница 570: ...BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INP INTEGER 0 INP Table 412 IB16A Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 Table c...

Страница 571: ... 16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function IB16A will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1 x 16 The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below When ...

Страница 572: ...BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx where x 1 to 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16A function block 13 9 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB 13 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE ...

Страница 573: ...99 V1 EN Figure 276 IB16FCVB function block 13 9 4 Signals Table 413 IB16FCVB Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection Table 414 IB16FCVB Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Out...

Страница 574: ...x 16 OUTx represents a value when activated The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the Table 415 When not activated the OUTx has the value 0 The value of each OUTx for 1 x 16 1 x 16 follows the general formulae OUTx 2x 1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 will be equal to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the IB16FCVB_1 function block The Integer ...

Страница 575: ...t 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx 1 x 16 are active equals 65535 This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the IB16FCVB function block The operator position input PSTO determines the operator place The integer number that is communicated to the IB16FCVB can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position Remote If PSTO...

Страница 576: ...gration value at a warning alarm overflow Possibilities for blocking and reset Report the integrated time 13 10 3 Function block TEIGGIO BLOCK IN RESET WARNING ALARM OVERFLOW ACCTIME IEC13000005 1 en vsd IEC13000005 V1 EN Figure 277 TEIGGIO function block 13 10 4 Signals Table 416 TEIGGIO Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs...

Страница 577: ...0 01 600 00 Time limit for warning supervision tAlarm 1 00 999999 99 s 0 01 1200 00 Time limit for alarm supervision 13 10 6 Operation principle The elapsed time integrator TEIGGIO provides time integration accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high blocking and reset supervision of limit transgression and overflow retaining of the integrated value if any warning alarm ...

Страница 578: ...ng alarm overflow shall be available as the initiation value for the integration followed by a restart RESET Reset the integration value Consequently all other outputs are also reset unconditionally on the input IN value reset the value of the non volatile memory to zero BLOCK Freeze the integration and block reset the other outputs unconditionally on the signal value BLOCK request overrides RESET...

Страница 579: ...ength the number of pulses that is the number of rising and falling flank pairs In principle a shorter task cycle time longer integrated time length or more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy 13 10 6 2 Memory storage The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non volatile memory only if any warning alarm or and overflow occurs Consequently there is a risk of data loss in the integr...

Страница 580: ...574 ...

Страница 581: ...rcurrent protection function The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit A zero clamping reduction is also supported that is the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which re...

Страница 582: ... provided depends on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities I sequence currents positive zero negative sequence magnitude and angle V sequence voltages positive zero and negative sequence magnitude and angle The CVMMXN function calculates three phase power quantities by using fundamental frequ...

Страница 583: ...efault Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for current inputs U3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs Table 421 CVMMXN Output signals Name Type Description S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range P_INST REAL Active power P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range Q_INST REA...

Страница 584: ...on GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Mode A B C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C A B C Selection of measured current and voltage PowAmpFact 0 000 6 000 0 001 1 000 Magnitude factor to scale power calculations PowAngComp 180 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 0 0 Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I V k 0 00 1 00 0 01 0 00 Low pass filter coefficient for power measure...

Страница 585: ...Minimum value in of IBase IMax 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase IRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type FrMin 0 000 100 000 Hz 0 001 0 000 Minimum value FrMax 0 000 100 000 Hz 0 001 70 000 Maximum value FrRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type Table 423 CVMMXN Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SDbRepI...

Страница 586: ...Int 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s PFZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping IGenZeroDb 1 100 IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in of IBase PFHiHiLim 1 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 High High limit physical value PFHiLim 1 000 1 000 0 001 0 800 High limit physical value PFLowLim 1 000 1 000 0 001 0 800 Low limit physical value PFLowLowLim 1 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Low Low lim...

Страница 587: ...nitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5 of Vn UAmpComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30 of Vn UAmpComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100 of Vn IAmpComp5 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5 of In IAmpComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30 of In IAmpCo...

Страница 588: ...ification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Phase current measurement CMMXU I SYMBOL SS V1 EN 14 1 3 2 Function block The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 ANSI08000225 1 en vsd CMMXU I3P I_A IA_RANGE IA_ANGL I_B IB_RANGE IB_ANGL I_C IC_RANGE IC_ANGL ANSI08000225 V1 EN Figure 280 CMMXU function block 14 1 3 3 Signals...

Страница 589: ...cl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s ILMax 0 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value ILRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Dead band Reporting type ILAngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s Table 428 CMMXU Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ILZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping ILHiHiLim 0 500000 A 1 1200 High...

Страница 590: ...le calibration for current at 100 of In 14 1 3 5 Monitored data Table 429 CMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description I_A REAL A IA Amplitude IA_ANGL REAL deg IA Angle I_B REAL A IB Amplitude IB_ANGL REAL deg IB Angle I_C REAL A IC Amplitude IC_ANGL REAL deg IC Angle 14 1 4 Phase phase voltage measurement VMMXU 14 1 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification ...

Страница 591: ...3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs Table 431 VMMXU Output signals Name Type Description V_AB REAL V_AB Amplitude VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle V_BC REAL V_BC Amplitude VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle V_CA REAL V_CA Amplitude VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Amplitude range VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 14...

Страница 592: ...Unit Step Default Description VLZeroDB 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping VLHiHilLim 0 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit physical value VLHiLim 0 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit physical value VLLowLim 0 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit physical value VLowLowLim 0 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit physical value VLMin 0 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value VLLimHys 0 000 100 000 V 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value ...

Страница 593: ...the logic configuration made in PCM600 IEC08000221 2 en vsd CMSQI I3P 3I0 3I0RANG 3I0ANGL I1 I1RANG I1ANGL I2 I2RANG I2ANGL IEC08000221 V2 EN Figure 282 CMSQI function block 14 1 5 3 Signals Table 435 CMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for current inputs Table 436 CMSQI Output signals Name Type Description 3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude 3I0RANG INTE...

Страница 594: ...mits 3I0AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s I1DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s I1Min 0 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value I1Max 0 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value I1RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Dead band Reporting type I1AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s I2DbRepInt 1 300 Typ...

Страница 595: ... Low limit physical value I1LowLowLim 0 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit physical value I1LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits I2ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping I2HiHiLim 0 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit physical value I2HiLim 0 500000 A 1 1100 High limit physical value I2LowLim 0 500000 A 1 0 Low limit physical value I2LowLowLim 0 50000...

Страница 596: ...onfiguration made in PCM600 ANSI08000224 1 en vsd VMSQI V3P 3V0 3V0RANG 3V0ANGL V1 V1RANG V1ANGL V2 V2RANG V2ANGL ANSI08000224 V1 EN Figure 283 VMSQI function block 14 1 6 3 Signals Table 440 VMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs Table 441 VMSQI Output signals Name Type Description 3V0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude 3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 M...

Страница 597: ...its 3V0AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s V1DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s V1Min 0 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value V1Max 0 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value V1RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Dead band Reporting type V1AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s V2DbRepInt 1 300 ...

Страница 598: ...00 Low limit physical value V1LowLowLim 0 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit physical value V1LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits V2ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping V2HiHiLim 0 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit physical value V2HiLim 0 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit physical value V2LowLim 0 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit physical value V2L...

Страница 599: ...d VNMMXU V3P V_A VA_RANGE VA_ANGL V_B VB_RANGE VB_ANGL V_C VC_RANGE VC_ANGL ANSI08000226 V1 EN Figure 284 VNMMXU function block 14 1 7 3 Signals Table 445 VNMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for voltage inputs Table 446 VNMMXU Output signals Name Type Description V_A REAL V_A Amplitude magnitude of reported value VA_RANGE INTEGER V_A Amplitu...

Страница 600: ... In s VMax 0 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value VRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Dead band Reporting type VLimHys 0 000 100 000 V 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits VAngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s Table 448 VNMMXU Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 ...

Страница 601: ...tions The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function Phase angle reference All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel The General setti...

Страница 602: ...t High limit Low limit Low low limit X_RANGE 2 X_RANGE 4 Y t X_RANGE 0 IEC05000657 V1 EN Figure 285 Presentation of operating limits Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output X_RANGE The output signal is an integer in the interval 0 4 0 Normal 1 High limit exceeded 3 High high limit exceeded 2 below Low limit and 4 below Low low limit The output may be connected to a measur...

Страница 603: ...clic reporting The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting XRepTyp The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or integral dead band reporting In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits en05000500 vsd Value 1 Y t Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value Rep...

Страница 604: ...Y limits for dead band are automatically set around it The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ΔY set limits Integral dead band reporting The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre set limit XDbRepInt figure 288 where an example of reporting with integral dead band supervision is shown The picture is simplifie...

Страница 605: ...IEC99000530 V1 EN Figure 288 Reporting with integral dead band supervision 14 1 8 2 Measurements CVMMXN Mode of operation The measurement function must be connected to three phase current and three phase voltage input in the configuration tool group signals but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to...

Страница 606: ...1 EN Equation 83 Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured 4 AB AB A B S V I I EQUATION1567 V1 EN Equation 84 2 AB A B V V I I I EQUATION1568 V1 EN Equation 85 Used when only VAB phase to phase voltage is available 5 BC BC B C S V I I EQUATION1569 V1 EN Equation 86 2 BC B C V V I I I EQUATION1570 V1 EN Equation 87 Used when only VBC phase to phase voltage is available 6 CA CA ...

Страница 607: ... modes that is from 3 to 9 it calculates the three phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P Q S PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas Re P S EQUATION1403 V1 EN Equation 96 Im Q S EQUATION1404 V1 EN Equation 97 2 2 S S P Q EQUATION1405 V1 EN Equation 98 cos P PF S j EQUATION1406 V1 EN Equat...

Страница 608: ...e compensation of In Measured current of In 0 5 Constant 5 30 100 Linear 100 Constant 100 30 5 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 10 10 Angle compensation Degrees Measured current of In ANSI05000652_3_en vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN Figure 289 Calibration curves The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for rela...

Страница 609: ... S and power factor are forced to zero as well Since the measurement supervision functionality included in the CVMMXN function is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision see section Measurement supervision Compensation facility In order to compensate for small magnitude and angul...

Страница 610: ...to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180 0 degrees With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar Frequency Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block It is simply obt...

Страница 611: ...1 8 5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI The measurement functions must be connected to three phase current CMSQI or voltage VMSQI input in the configuration tool to be operable No outputs other than X_RANG are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals Input signals are obtained from the pre processing block and transferred to corresp...

Страница 612: ... CNTGGIO 14 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Event counter CNTGGIO S00946 V1 EN 14 2 2 Functionality Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter input has been activated 14 2 3 Function block CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER...

Страница 613: ... Output of counter 1 VALUE2 INTEGER Output of counter 2 VALUE3 INTEGER Output of counter 3 VALUE4 INTEGER Output of counter 4 VALUE5 INTEGER Output of counter 5 VALUE6 INTEGER Output of counter 6 14 2 5 Settings Table 453 CNTGGIO Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation 14 2 6 Monitored data Table 454 CNTGGIO ...

Страница 614: ...liary power interruption it will be lost CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption The function block also has an input BLOCK At activation of this input all six counters are blocked The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing The function block has an input RESET At activation of this input all six counters are set...

Страница 615: ...es that limit 14 3 3 Principle of operation Limit counter L4UFCNT counts the number of positive and or negative flanks on the binary input signal depending on the function settings L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits The four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the reset of th...

Страница 616: ... Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero as illustrated in figure 293 IEC12000626_1_en vsd Max value 3 Max value 1 Max ...

Страница 617: ...initial states until the release of the block input 14 3 3 2 Reporting The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely for example from a IEC 61850 client The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI graphical di...

Страница 618: ...ion Operation Disabled On Disabled Operation Disable Enable CountType Set Reset DBLL or DLLB Set Select counting on positive and or negative sides CounterLimit1 1 65535 1 100 Value of the first limit CounterLimit2 1 65535 1 200 Value of the second limit CounterLimit3 1 65535 1 300 Value of the third limit CounterLimit4 1 65535 1 400 Value of the fourth limit MaxValue 1 65535 1 500 Maximum count va...

Страница 619: ...ecorder Disturbance recorder Fault locator The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration initiating conditions recording times and large storage capacity A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder All connected signals from start of pre fault time to ...

Страница 620: ...turned off RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80 of memory used 14 4 2 4 Settings Table 462 DRPRDRE Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Enable Disable PreFaultRecT 0 05 ...

Страница 621: ...r level trig for analog channel 2 activated UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 3 activated OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 3 activated UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 4 activated OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 4 activated UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 5 activated OvTrigSt...

Страница 622: ... OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 13 activated UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 14 activated OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 14 activated UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 15 activated OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 15 activated UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Under level trig fo...

Страница 623: ...ted OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 24 activated UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 25 activated OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 25 activated UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 26 activated OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 26 activated UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Under level trig...

Страница 624: ...for analog channel 35 activated OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 35 activated UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 36 activated OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 36 activated UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 37 activated OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 37 activated UnTrigStatC...

Страница 625: ...UT2 GRPINPUT3 GRPINPUT4 GRPINPUT5 GRPINPUT6 GRPINPUT7 GRPINPUT8 GRPINPUT9 GRPINPUT10 IEC09000348 1 en vsd IEC09000348 V1 EN Figure 295 A1RADR function block analog inputs example for A1RADR A2RADR and A3RADR 14 4 3 3 Signals A1RADR A3RADR Input signals Tables for input signals for A1RADR A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for GRPINPUT number A1RADR GRPINPUT1 GRPINPUT10 A2RADR GRPINPUT11 GRPINPUT...

Страница 626: ... signal for input 9 GRPINPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 10 14 4 3 4 Settings A1RADR A3RADR Settings Setting tables for A1RADR A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel numbers A1RADR channel01 channel10 A2RADR channel11 channel20 A3RADR channel21 channel30 Table 465 A1RADR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation01 Disabled Enabled Disabl...

Страница 627: ...og channel 3 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo3 0 255 1 0 Information number for analog channel 3 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType4 0 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 4 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo4 0 255 1 0 Information number for analog channel 4 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType5 0 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 5 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo5 0 255 1 0 Information number for analog channel 5 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType6 0 2...

Страница 628: ...el 2 UnderTrigOp02 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 2 on or not off UnderTrigLe02 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in of signal OverTrigOp02 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 2 on or not off OverTrigLe02 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in of signal NomValue03 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal v...

Страница 629: ...t off OverTrigLe06 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in of signal NomValue07 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 7 UnderTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 7 on or not off UnderTrigLe07 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in of signal OverTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for anal...

Страница 630: ... in of signal OverTrigOp10 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 10 on or not off OverTrigLe10 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in of signal 14 4 4 Analog input signals A4RADR 14 4 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Analog input signals A4RADR 14 4 4 2 Function bl...

Страница 631: ...on Operation31 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation32 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation33 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation34 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation35 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation36 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation37 Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation On off Operation38 ...

Страница 632: ...0 Information number for analog channel 35 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType36 0 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 36 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo36 0 255 1 0 Information number for analog channel 36 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType37 0 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 37 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo37 0 255 1 0 Information number for analog channel 37 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType38 0 255 1 0 Function type for analog ch...

Страница 633: ... 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 33 UnderTrigOp33 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 33 on or not off UnderTrigLe33 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33 in of signal OverTrigOp33 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 33 on or not off OverTrigLe33 0 5000 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33 in of sig...

Страница 634: ... off OverTrigLe37 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in of signal NomValue38 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 38 UnderTrigOp38 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 38 on or not off UnderTrigLe38 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38 in of signal OverTrigOp38 Disabled Enabled Disabled Use over level trigger for a...

Страница 635: ...ription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Binary input signals B1RBDR Binary input signals B2RBDR Binary input signals B3RBDR Binary input signals B4RBDR Binary input signals B5RBDR Binary input signals B6RBDR 14 4 5 2 Function block B1RBDR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 IN...

Страница 636: ...AN 0 Binary channel 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary c...

Страница 637: ...rip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3 TrigDR04 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED04 Disabled Start Trip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4 TrigDR05 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED05 Disabled Start Trip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5 TrigDR06 Disabled Enabled Disabl...

Страница 638: ...bled Start Trip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11 TrigDR12 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED12 Disabled Start Trip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12 TrigDR13 Disabled Enabled Disabled Trigger operation On Off SetLED13 Disabled Start Trip Pick up and trip Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13 TrigDR14 Disabled...

Страница 639: ...0870 5 103 FunType5 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo5 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType6 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo6 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType7 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo7 0 255 1 0 Information numb...

Страница 640: ...55 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo16 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16 IEC 60870 5 103 Table 472 B1RBDR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 1 IndicationMa01 Hide Show Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1 Tri...

Страница 641: ...k for binary channel 9 TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 10 IndicationMa10 Hide Show Hide Indication mask for binary channel 10 TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 11 IndicationMa11 Hide Show Hide Indication mask for binary channel 11 TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 T...

Страница 642: ...t events in the system The functions included in the disturbance report are Sequential of events Indications Event recorder Trip value recorder Disturbance recorder Fault locator FL Figure 298 shows the relations between Disturbance Report included functions and function blocks Sequential of events Event recorder and Indications uses information from the binary input function blocks BxRBDR Trip va...

Страница 643: ...isturbance report is stored in non volatile flash memories This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0 999 en05000125_ansi vsd Disturbance report Record no N Record no N 1 Record no N 100 General dist information Indications Trip values Event recordings Disturbance recording Fault locator Event lis...

Страница 644: ...either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool or a FTP or MMS over 61850 client The PC can be connected to the IED front rear or remotely via the station bus Ethernet ports 14 4 6 2 Indications Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance not time tagged see Indication section for detailed information 14 4 6 3 Event recorder The event record...

Страница 645: ...tagging The IED has a built in real time calendar and clock This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report 14 4 6 9 Recording times Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report Disturbance recorder event recorder and indication function register disturbance da...

Страница 646: ...llowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time 14 4 6 10 Analog signals Up to 40 analog signals c...

Страница 647: ...test updated sample until a new updated sample is available Application configuration tool ACT is used for analog configuration of the Disturbance report The preprocessor function block SMAI calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected AI4 input not used SMAI makes the information available as a group signal output phase outputs and calculated residual outp...

Страница 648: ...bance report Operation Operation TrigDR Disabled A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow PICKUP and red TRIP LED on the local HMI SetLED Disabled Pickup Trip Pickup and Trip The selected signals are presented in the event recorder sequential of events and the disturbance recording But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers The indications are also se...

Страница 649: ...this trigger is indicated with a less than sign with its name The procedure is separately performed for each channel This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal The operate time for this initiation is typically in the range of one cycle 16 2 3 ms for a 60 Hz network All under over trig signal information is available on the...

Страница 650: ...ximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 96 Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 Maximum number of events in the Sequence of events 1000 first in first out Maximum total recording time 3 4 s recording time and maximum number of channels typical value 340 seconds 100 recordings at 50 Hz 280...

Страница 651: ...cations function has no function block of it s own 14 5 3 Signals 14 5 3 1 Input signals The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function 14 5 4 Operation principle The LED indications display this information Green LED Steady light In Service Flashing light Internal fail Dark No power supply Yellow LED Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturb...

Страница 652: ... used in disturbance recorder function indications and event recorder function 14 5 5 Technical data Table 474 DRPRDRE technical data Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance 96 Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100 14 6 Event recorder 14 6 1 Functionality Quick complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and or in ...

Страница 653: ...vents are collected during the total recording time pre post fault and limit time and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording In case of overlapping recordings due to PostRetrig Enabled and a new trig signal appears during post fault time events will be saved in both recording files The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is th...

Страница 654: ...ontain up to 1000 time tagged events stored in a FIFO buffer 14 7 2 Function block The Sequential of events has no function block of it s own 14 7 3 Signals 14 7 3 1 Input signals The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance report function 14 7 4 Operation principle When a binary signal connected to the disturbance report function changes status th...

Страница 655: ...RPRDRE technical data Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000 Resolution 1 ms Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing 14 8 Trip value recorder 14 8 1 Functionality Information about the pre fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation TheTrip valuerecordercalculatesthevaluesofallselectedanaloginputsignalsconnected to th...

Страница 656: ...The estimation uses samples during one period The post fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares RLS method The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1 2 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals If no starting point is found in the recording the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation ...

Страница 657: ... It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions Up to 9 9 seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings 14 9 2 Function block The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it s own 14 9 3 Signals See Dis...

Страница 658: ...ry input and or from analog inputs over underlevel trig A user defined name for each of the signals can be set These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality 14 9 5 1 Memory and storage The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100 The IED flash disk sho...

Страница 659: ...nalog channels Information e g trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over or Undertrig level and operation Over or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction Binary Signal names Status of binary input signals The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file For example sampling rate number of channels system ...

Страница 660: ...10 IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions SPGGIO 14 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions SPGGIO 14 10 2 Functionality IEC61850 generic communication I O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation 14 ...

Страница 661: ... requests this signal To get the signal PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information 14 11 IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO 14 11 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions 16 inpu...

Страница 662: ... status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status IN15 ...

Страница 663: ...tatus OUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Output 5 status OUT6 GROUP SIGNAL Output 6 status OUT7 GROUP SIGNAL Output 7 status OUT8 GROUP SIGNAL Output 8 status OUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Output 9 status OUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Output 10 status OUT11 GROUP SIGNAL Output 11 status OUT12 GROUP SIGNAL Output 12 status OUT13 GROUP SIGNAL Output 13 status OUT14 GROUP SIGNAL Output 14 status OUT15 GROUP SIGNAL Output 15 status OUT16 GR...

Страница 664: ...eric communication I O functions MVGGIO 14 12 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IEC61850 generic communication I O functions MVGGIO 14 12 2 Functionality IEC61850 generic communication I O functions MVGGIO function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the subs...

Страница 665: ... MV hLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV lLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV llLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 900 00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV min 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 1000 00 Minimum value multiplied with the...

Страница 666: ... C37 2 device number Measured value expander block MVEXP 14 13 2 Functionality The current and voltage measurements functions CVMMXN CMMXU VMMXU and VNMMXU current and voltage sequence measurement functions CMSQI and VMSQI and IEC 61850 generic communication I O functions MVGGIO are provided with measurement supervision functionality All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits ...

Страница 667: ...low limit LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low low limit LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low low limit 14 13 5 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 GlobalBaseSel Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase VBase and SBase 14 13 6 Operation principle The input signal mu...

Страница 668: ... function supports kilometer and mile for the line length unit The fault distance will be presented with the same unit as the line length and is mapped to IEC61850 8 1 communication protocol where the fault distance is supposed to be in kilometer km Select the line length unit to kilometer for compliance with IEC61850 The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages aft...

Страница 669: ...5 LMBRFLO function block 14 14 4 Signals Table 489 LMBRFLO Input signals Name Type Default Description PHSEL_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase A PHSEL_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase B PHSEL_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase C CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to initiate fault distance calculation Table 490 LMBRFLO Output signals Name Type Description CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made FLT_X...

Страница 670: ...sequence line reactance R0L 0 001 1500 000 ohm p 0 001 8 750 Zero sequence line resistance X0L 0 001 1500 000 ohm p 0 001 50 000 Zero sequence line reactance R0M 0 000 1500 000 ohm p 0 001 0 000 Zero sequence mutual resistance X0M 0 000 1500 000 ohm p 0 001 0 000 Zero sequence mutual reactance LineLengthUnit kilometer miles kilometer Line length unit LineLength 0 0 10000 0 0 1 40 0 Length of line ...

Страница 671: ...3 N 4 L1 L2 5 L2 L3 6 L3 L1 7 L1 L2 L3 Fault loop 14 14 7 Operation principle The Fault locator LMBRFLO in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy When calculating distance to fault pre fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data thus the analog ...

Страница 672: ...ault Line length unit can also be configured using PCM600 The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed via the LHMI or PCM600 14 14 7 1 Measuring Principle For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends the effect of double end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the cur...

Страница 673: ...s current change due to the fault IF is the fault current and p is a relative distance to the fault The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by IF IFA DA EQUATION96 V1 EN Equation 102 Where IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement IED A and DA is a fault current distribution factor that is the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current ...

Страница 674: ...A 3 2 I I D EQUATION1599 V1 EN ABC AB ABG VAA VBA IAA IBA DIABA BC BCG VBA VCA IBA ICA DICBA CA CAG VCA VAA ICA IAA DICAA The KN complex quantity for zero sequence compensation for the single line is equal to KN Z0L Z1L 3 Z1L EQUATION99 V1 EN Equation 105 DI is the change in current that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault In the following the positive sequence impeda...

Страница 675: ... EN Equation 107 From these equations it can be seen that if Z0m 0 then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 104 or 106 is a function of p the general equation 106 can be written in the form p 2 p K1 K2 K3 RF 0 EQUATION103 V1 EN Equation 108 Where A B 1 A L ...

Страница 676: ...3 and then inserted to equation 112 According to equation 112 the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation Equation 112 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution A simplified load compensated algorithm which gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault is used to establish the value that should be selec...

Страница 677: ...nction Value or range Accuracy Reactive and resistive reach 0 001 1500 000 Ω phase 2 0 static accuracy 2 0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions Voltage range 0 1 1 1 x Vn Current range 0 5 30 x In Phase selection According to input signals Maximum number of fault locations 100 14 15 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT 14 15 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC ...

Страница 678: ...ettable operate time and resets when the battery undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears after settable reset time 14 15 4 Signals Table 496 SPVNZBAT Input signals Name Type Default Description V_BATT REAL 0 00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function Table 497 SPVNZBAT Output signals Name Type Description AL_VLOW BOO...

Страница 679: ...cription V_BATT REAL 0 00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function 14 15 7 Monitored Data Table 500 SPVNZBAT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BATTVOLT REAL kV Service value of the battery terminal voltage 14 15 8 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The c...

Страница 680: ...alue of the BattVoltLowLim setting the pickup signal PU_VLOW is activated The measured voltage between the battery terminals V_BATT is available through the Monitored data view High level detector The level detector compares the battery voltage V_BATT with the set value of the BattVoltHiLim setting If the value of the V_BATT input exceeds the set value of the BattVoltHiLim setting the pickup signa...

Страница 681: ...cation IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG 63 14 16 2 Functionality Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG 63 is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the function In addition the function generates alarms based on received inform...

Страница 682: ...nd temperature lockout Table 503 SSIMG 63 Output signals Name Type Description PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level 14 16 5 Settings Table 504 SSIMG 63 Group settings ba...

Страница 683: ...ssure below lockout level If the input signal PRES_ALM is high which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is below alarm level the function initiates output signal PRES_ALM pressure below alarm level after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required Similarly if the input signal PRES_LO is high which indicate gas pressure in the circuit breake...

Страница 684: ...el in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the function In addition the function generates alarms based on received information 14 17 3 Function block ANSI09000128 1 en vsd SSIML 71 BLOCK BLK_ALM LEVEL TEMP LVL_ALM LEVEL_LO SET_L_LO SET_T_LO RESET_LO LEVEL LVL_ALM LVL_LO TEMP TEMP_ALM TEMP_LO ANSI09000128 V1 EN Figure 311 SSIML 71 function block 14 17 4 Signals Inputs LEVEL and TEMP tog...

Страница 685: ...rature above lockout level 14 17 5 Settings Table 508 SSIML 71 Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Disable Enable Operation LevelAlmLimit 0 00 25 00 0 01 5 00 Alarm setting for level LevelLOLimit 0 00 25 00 0 01 3 00 Level lockout setting TempAlarmLimit 40 00 200 00 0 01 30 00 Temperature alarm level setting of the medium TempLOL...

Страница 686: ...l LVL_LO is high which indicate oil level in the circuit breaker is below lockout level the output signal LVL_LO will be initiated after a time delay The two time delay settings tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut are included in order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the oil level If the oil level in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time delays the co...

Страница 687: ...generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings The function contains a block alarm functionality The supervised and presented breaker functions include breaker open and close travel time spring charging time number of breaker operations accumulated IYt per phase with alarm and lockout remaining breaker life per phase breaker inactivity 14 18 3 Function block ANSI10000281 1 en v...

Страница 688: ...e TRVTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset travel time Table 511 SSCBR Output signals Name Type Description TRVTOAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRVTCAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value SPRCHRAL BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value OPRALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit OPRLOALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit IACCALM BOOL...

Страница 689: ...larm limit for number of operations OpNumLO 0 9999 1 300 Lockout limit for number of operations tOpenAlm 0 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time tCloseAlm 0 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for close travel time OpenTimeCorr 0 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time CloseTimeCorr 0 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time DifTimeCorr 10 10 ms 1 5 Correction f...

Страница 690: ...phase C IACC_A REAL Accumulated currents power Iyt phase A IACC_B REAL Accumulated currents power Iyt phase B IACC_C REAL Accumulated currents power Iyt phase C 14 18 7 Operation principle The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes a number of metering and monitoring subfunctions The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values...

Страница 691: ... ted energy Breaker life time Spring charge indication Gas pressure supervision BLK_ALM TRVTRST TRVTRST I3P I_A I_B I_B GUID FE21BBDC 57A6 425C B22B 8E646C1BD932 ANSI V1 EN Figure 313 Functional module diagram 14 18 7 1 Circuit breaker status The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker that is whether the breaker is in an open closed or intermediate position...

Страница 692: ... is high and the current is zero The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high The breaker is in the intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts have the same value that is both are in the logical level 0 or 1 or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is not zero The status of the breaker is...

Страница 693: ...nactive days exceed the limit value defined with the InactDayAlm setting the NOOPRALM alarm is initiated The time in hours at which this alarm is activated can be set with the InactHourAlm parameter as coordinates of UTC The alarm signal NOOPRALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK 14 18 7 3 Breaker contact travel time The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker c...

Страница 694: ... in order to incorporate the time t1 t2 a correction factor needs to be added with tOpen to get the actual opening time This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr t1 t2 The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr t3 t4 setting to the measured closing time The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time tTravelClose are available throu...

Страница 695: ...he Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the clear menu from LHMI Alarm limit check The OPRALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the value set with the OpNumAlm threshold setting ...

Страница 696: ...5502A39 4835 4F43 A7ED A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN Figure 319 Significance of theDiffTimeCorr setting The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the energy from the time the main contact opens If the setting is positive the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to the value set with the DiffTimeCorr setting When ...

Страница 697: ...l the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections CB life estimator POSCLOSE CBCNTRST BLOCK Alarm limit check CBLIFEAL BLK_ALM I3P I_A I_B I_C GUID 1565CD41 3ABF 4DE7 AF68 51623380DF29 ANSI V1 EN Figure 320 Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker Circuit breaker life estimator The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of ...

Страница 698: ...cuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the clear menu from LHMI It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLOCK 14 18 7 7 Circuit breaker spring charged indication The circuit breaker spring charged indication subfunction calculates the spring chargi...

Страница 699: ... subfunction can be described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections ALMPRES LOPRES PRESLO PRESALM BLOCK BLK_ALM 0 0 tPressAlm 0 0 TPressLO ANSI11000293 1 en vsd ANSI11000293 V1 EN Figure 322 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and ALMPRES Pressure...

Страница 700: ...g of alarm for spring charging time 0 00 60 00 s 0 5 25 ms Time delay for gas pressure alarm 0 00 60 00 s 0 5 25 ms Time delay for gas pressure lockout 0 00 60 00 s 0 5 25 ms 14 19 Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEAS 14 19 1 Functionality 103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function bloc...

Страница 701: ...ect an input signals on IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEAS that is not connected to the corresponding output on MMXU function to outputs on the fixed signal function block 14 19 2 Function block ANSI10000287 1 en vsd I103MEAS BLOCK I_A I_B I_C IN V_A V_B V_C V_AB V_N P Q F ANSI10000287 V1 EN Figure 324 I103MEAS function block 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 14 Monitoring 695 Technical manual ...

Страница 702: ...ettings Table 516 I103MEAS Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 MaxIL1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase A MaxIL2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase B MaxIL3 1 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase C MaxIN 1 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN MaxUL1 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 230 00 Maximum voltage for phase A...

Страница 703: ... 14 20 3 Signals Table 517 I103MEASUSR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting INPUT1 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 1 INPUT2 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 2 INPUT3 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 3 INPUT4 REAL 0 0 Service value for measurement on input 4 INPUT5 REAL 0 0 Service value for measur...

Страница 704: ...000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 5 MaxMeasur6 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 6 MaxMeasur7 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 7 MaxMeasur8 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 8 MaxMeasur9 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on i...

Страница 705: ...recloser 130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130 auto recloser blocked 14 21 4 Settings Table 520 I103AR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 14 22 Function status ground fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 14 22 1 Functionality I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor dir...

Страница 706: ... 14 23 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 14 23 1 Functionality I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction Each input on the function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal present in the configuration For example 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the device and therefore must be c...

Страница 707: ... Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64 start phase A 65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65 start phase B 66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66 start phase C 67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67 start residual current IN 68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68 trip general 69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69 trip phase A 70_TR_B BO...

Страница 708: ...Information number 86 trip measuring system phase A 87_MTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87 trip measuring system phase B 88_MTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88 trip measuring system phase C 89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89 trip measuring system neutral N 90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90 over current trip stage low 91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91 over current trip stage high...

Страница 709: ...ption BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19 reset LEDs 21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21 test mode is active 22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22 setting changed 23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23 setting group 1 is active 24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24 setting group 2 is active 25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25 setting gr...

Страница 710: ... 527 I103SUPERV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32 measurand supervision of I 33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33 measurand supervision of U 37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37 I high high back up protection 38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38 fuse failure VT 46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information numb...

Страница 711: ...mple in mapping the INF numbers not supported directly by specific function blocks like INF17 INF18 INF20 or INF35 After connecting the appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs the user must also set the InfNo_x values in the settings GUID 391D4145 B7E6 4174 B3F7 753ADDA4D06F V1 EN Figure 331 IEC 60870 5 103I103USRDEF 1 14 26 2 Function block IEC10000294 1 en vsd I103USRDEF BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2...

Страница 712: ... Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 5 Function type 1 255 InfNo_1 1 255 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 1 255 InfNo_2 1 255 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 1 255 InfNo_3 1 255 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 1 255 InfNo_4 1 255 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 1 255 InfNo_5 1 255 1 5 Information numbe...

Страница 713: ...ses for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter for calculation of energy consumption values The pulses are captured by the BIO binary input output module and then read by the PCGGIO function A scaled service value is available over the station bus 15 1 3 Function block IEC09000335 2 en vsd PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL IEC09000335 V2 E...

Страница 714: ...alue is generated SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information 15 1 5 Settings Table 533 PCGGIO Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter CountCriteria Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria Sca...

Страница 715: ... reported value is a 32 bit signed integer with a range 0 2147483647 The counter value is stored in semiretain memory The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity Scaled Value pulse count x scale Time and Pulse Counter Quality The Pulse Counter Quality consists of Invalid board hardware error or configuration error Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted The transmission of the...

Страница 716: ...reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle That is in the first message after IED start up in the first message after deblocking and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked There are two reasons why the counter is blocked The BLOCK input is set or The binary input module where...

Страница 717: ...used to calculate energy consumption Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export direction Values can be read or generated as pulses Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function 15 2 3 Function block ETPMMTR P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD M...

Страница 718: ...rm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value ERFACC...

Страница 719: ...accumulated energy value Table 539 ETPMMTR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description EALim 0 001 10000000000 000 MWh 0 001 1000000 000 Active energy limit ERLim 0 001 10000000000 000 MVArh 0 001 1000 000 Reactive energy limit EnZeroClamp Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable of zero point clamping detection function LevZeroClampP 0 001 10000 000 MW 0 001 10 000 Zero poi...

Страница 720: ...ive and reactive power from the Measurements CVMMXN function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy The energy values in MWh and MVarh are available as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction The accumulated energy values can be reset from t...

Страница 721: ...gy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR to the Measurements function CVMMXN 15 2 8 Technical data Table 541 ETPMMTR technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Energy metering MWh Export Import MVArh Export Import Input from MMXU No extra error at steady load 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 15 Metering 715 Technical manual ...

Страница 722: ...716 ...

Страница 723: ...abled by the IEC 61850 8 1 communication protocol The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port s for the substation communication standard IEC 61850 8 1 IEC 61850 8 1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices IEDs from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering Peer to peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard Disturbance files uploa...

Страница 724: ... All communication connectors except for the front port connector are placed on integrated communication modules The IED is connected to Ethernet based communication systems via the fibre optic multimode LC connector s 100BASE FX The IED supports SNTP and IRIG B time synchronization methods with a time stamping accuracy of 1 ms Ethernet based SNTP and DNP3 With time synchronization wiring IRIG B T...

Страница 725: ...eed for the IEDs 100 Mbit s Protocol IEC 61850 8 1 Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE FX Protocol DNP3 0 TCP Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE FX Protocol serial IEC 60870 5 103 Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd Protocol serial DNP3 0 Communication speed for the IEDs 300 115200 Bd 16 3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 16 3 1 Identification Function d...

Страница 726: ...APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL IEC09000099_1_en vsd IEC09000099 V1 EN Figure 336 GOOSEINTLKRCV function block 16 3 3 Signals Table 545 GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals Section 16 1...

Страница 727: ...VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position ...

Страница 728: ...s valid APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid 16 3 4 Settings Table 547 GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Disabled Enabled 16 4 Goose binary ...

Страница 729: ...C09000236 V1 EN Figure 337 GOOSEBINRCV function block 16 4 3 Signals Table 548 GOOSEBINRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals Table 549 GOOSEBINRCV Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1 OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2 OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2 Table continues ...

Страница 730: ...ut 10 OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11 OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12 OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13 OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14 OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14 OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15...

Страница 731: ... level If quality data validity is GOOD then the OUTxVAL output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the OUTxVAL output will be LOW 16 5 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV 16 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function bl...

Страница 732: ...nication valid for double point output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 16 5 5 Settings Table 553 GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Enable Disable 16 5 6 Operation principle The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is ...

Страница 733: ...LOW 16 6 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 16 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 16 6 2 Functionality GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE 16 6 3 Function block IEC10000250 1 en vsd ...

Страница 734: ...ALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the integer values The impleme...

Страница 735: ...nction block IEC10000251 1 en vsd GOOSEMVRCV BLOCK MVOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000251 V1 EN Figure 340 GOOSEMVRCV function block 16 7 4 Signals Table 557 GOOSEMVRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 558 GOOSEMVRCV Output signals Name Type Description MVOUT REAL Measurand value output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output C...

Страница 736: ... input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the float values The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 16 8 GOOSE function block to ...

Страница 737: ...ble 561 GOOSESPRCV Output signals Name Type Description SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 16 8 5 Settings Table 562 GOOSESPRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Disabled Operation Off On 16 8 6 ...

Страница 738: ...rimary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave The communication is based on a point to point principle The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870 5 103 communication messages Function blocks available for the IEC 60870 5 103 protocol are described in sections Control and Monitoring The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870 5 103 includes the 650 series vendor ...

Страница 739: ...Time synchronization mode EvalTimeAccuracy Disabled 5ms 10ms 20ms 40ms 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time EventRepMode SeqOfEvent HiPriSpont SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode Table 564 RS485103 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SlaveAddress 1 255 1 1 Slave address BaudRate 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line CycMeasRepTime 1 0 1800 0 s 0 1...

Страница 740: ...439 3 Edition 2 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 16 10 2 Principle of operation The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI Main Menu Configuration Communication TCP IP configuation ETHLAN1_AB The settings are also visible in PST in PCM600 The communication is performed in parallel that is the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneousl...

Страница 741: ...uo Redundancy Supervision Station Control System IEC13000003 V1 EN Figure 342 Redundant station bus 16 10 3 Function block PRPSTATUS LAN1 A LAN1 B IEC13000011 1 en vsd IEC13000011 V1 EN Figure 343 PRPSTATUS function block 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 16 Station communication 735 Technical manual ...

Страница 742: ... with IP address IP port number and protocol format The format can be either syslog RFC 5424 or Common Event Format CEF from ArcSight 16 11 2 Settings Table 566 ACTIVLOG Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ExtLogSrv1Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Disabled External log server 1 type ExtLogSrv1Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 1 port n...

Страница 743: ... log server 5 type ExtLogSrv5Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 5 port number ExtLogSrv5IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 5 IP address ExtLogSrv6Type Disabled ExtLogSrv1Type SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Disabled External log server 6 type ExtLogSrv6Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 6 port number ExtLogSrv6IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 6 IP address 16 12 G...

Страница 744: ...NTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event 16 13 3 Settings Table 568 SECALARM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled Enabled Enabled Operation On Off Section 16 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Station communication 738 Technical manual ...

Страница 745: ...saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool 17 1 2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG 17 1 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Internal error signal INTERRSIG 17 1 2 2 Function block INTERRSIG FAIL WARNING TSYNCERR RTCERR DISABLE ANSI09000334 2 en vsd ANSI09000334 V1 EN Figur...

Страница 746: ...Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST 17 1 3 2 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 17 1 4 Operation principle The self supervision operates continuously and includes Normal micro processor watchdog function Checking of digitized measuring signals Other alarms for example hardware and time synchronization The SELFSUPEVLST...

Страница 747: ...ly module This output contact is activated where there is no fault and deactivated where there is a fault by the Internal Fail signal see Figure 345 The software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of the PSM will deactivate the contact as well IEC09000390 1 en vsd Power supply fault Watchdog TX overflow Master resp Supply fault ReBoot I O Internal Fail CPU Power supply module I O node...

Страница 748: ...rror DNP 3Error IEC 61850 NOT READY ANSI09000381 2 en vsd ANSI09000381 V2 EN Figure 346 Self supervision function block internal signals Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block The signals from INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signaliz...

Страница 749: ...ock Error Real time clock status Time Synch Error Time synchronization status Runtime App Error Runtime application error status Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status Setting s Changed Setting s changed Setting Group s Changed Setting group s changed Change Lock Change lock status File System Error Fault t...

Страница 750: ...on startup for example SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes The operating systems background task is used for the measurements Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects The states can be CREATED INITIALIZED RUNNING for example Se...

Страница 751: ... included in all IEDs equipped with an analog input module This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects First is the validation part that checks that the A D conversion seems to work as expected Secondly the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI Wh...

Страница 752: ...fication ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGE N 17 2 2 2 Settings Table 574 TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CoarseSyncSrc Disabled SNTP DNP IEC60870 5 103 Disabled Coarse time synchronization source FineSyncSource Disabled SNTP IRIG B Disabled Fine time synchronization source SyncMaster Disabled SNTP Server Disabled Ac...

Страница 753: ...address RedServIP Add 0 255 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Redundant server IP address 17 2 4 Time system summer time begin DSTBEGIN 17 2 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Time system summer time begins DSTBEGIN 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 17 Basic IED functions 747 Technical manual ...

Страница 754: ...Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time starts UTCTimeOfDay 00 00 00 30 1 00 1 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time starts 17 2 5 Time system summer time ends DSTEND 17 2 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device ...

Страница 755: ...st Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time ends UTCTimeOfDay 00 00 00 30 1 00 1 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends 17 2 6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE 17 2 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE 17 2 6 2 Settings Table 578 TIMEZONE Non group sett...

Страница 756: ... domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard 17 2 8 Operation principle 17 2 8 1 General concepts Time definitions The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock and the time the clock is intended to have Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error that is the time gained or lost by th...

Страница 757: ...o lower levels Function Synchronization from a higher level Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level IEC09000342 1 en vsd IEC09000342 V1 EN Figure 349 Synchronization principle A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level As the level decreases the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well A function can have s...

Страница 758: ... may always set the fine time and the source gives a large offset towards the IED time After this the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike filter i e if the source glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error this is neglected FineSyncSource that may always set the time is only IRIG B It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source as some clock...

Страница 759: ...oth fine and coarse source shall not be used SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network that is not more than 4 5 switches or routers away from the IED The SNTP server is dedicated for its task or at least equipped with a real time operating system that is not a PC with SNTP server software The SNTP server should be stable that is either synchronized from...

Страница 760: ...ning of the time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the IEC60870 5 103 protocol 17 2 9 Technical data Table 580 Time synchronization time tagging Function Value Time tagging resolution events and sampled measurement values 1 ms Time tagging error with synchronization once min minute pulse synchronization events an...

Страница 761: ...ttingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup MaxNoSetGrp 1 4 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1 4 17 3 3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP 17 3 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP 17 3 3 2 Function block ANSI09000064 1 en vsd ACTVGRP ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP1...

Страница 762: ...ur functional inputs each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group Five functional output signals are available for configuration purposes so that information on the active setting group is always available A setting group is selected by using the local HMI from a front connected personal computer remotely from ...

Страница 763: ...TIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 ACTVGRP GRP_CHGD ANSI09000063_1_en vsd ANSIC09000063 V1 EN Figure 351 Connection of the function to external circuits The above example also shows the five output signals GRP1 to 4 for confirmation of which group that is active and the GRP_CHGD signal which is normally connected to...

Страница 764: ... testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED No settings will be changed thus mistakes are avoided Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode 17 4 3 Function block TESTMODE INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT IEC09000219 1 vsd IEC09000219 V1 EN Figure 352 TESTMODE function block 17 4 4 Signals Table 584 TESTMODE Input signals Name...

Страница 765: ...activated While the IED is in test mode the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are blocked Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI To enable these blockings the...

Страница 766: ...missioning or maintenance test 17 5 Change lock function CHNGLCK 17 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Change lock function CHNGLCK 17 5 2 Functionality Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete The purpose is to block ina...

Страница 767: ...ble 588 CHNGLCK Output signals Name Type Description ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override 17 5 5 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 17 5 6 Operation principle The Change lock function CHNGLCK is configured using ACT The function when activated will still allow the following change...

Страница 768: ...d 17 6 IED identifiers TERMINALID 17 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IED identifiers TERMINALID 17 6 2 Functionality IED identifiers TERMINALID function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system not only in the substation but in a whole region or a country Use only characters A Z a z and 0 9 ...

Страница 769: ...7 7 Product information 17 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Product information PRODINF 17 7 2 Functionality The Product identifiers function identifies the IED The function has seven pre set settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important IEDProdType ProductVer ProductDef SerialNo OrderingNo Prod...

Страница 770: ...equency 50 0 60 0 Hz 10 0 50 0 Rated system frequency PhaseRotation Normal ABC Inverse ACB Normal ABC System phase rotation 17 9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI 17 9 1 Functionality Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI also known as the preprocessor function processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog signals connected like the R...

Страница 771: ... 17 9 3 Function block ANSI09000137 1 en vsd SMAI_20_1 BLOCK DFTSPFC REVROT GRP1_A GRP1_B GRP1_C GRP1_N SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN ANSI09000137 V1 EN Figure 354 SMAI_20_1 function block SMAI_20_2 BLOCK REVROT GRP2_A GRP2_B GRP2_C GRP2_N AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN ANSI09000138 1 en vsd ANSI09000138 V1 EN Figure 355 SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 function block Note that input and output signals on SMA...

Страница 772: ...L Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1 4 AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1 3 are connected Table 593 SMAI_...

Страница 773: ...Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output DFTReference InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFT...

Страница 774: ...commended see the Setting guidelines Table 597 SMAI_20_12 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups DFTReference InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT...

Страница 775: ... a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency The output signals AI1 AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the connected input signals GRPx_A GRPx_B GRPx_C and GRPx_N GRPx_N is always the neutral current If GRPx_N is not connected the output AI4 is zero The AIN output is the calculated residual quantity obtained as a sum of...

Страница 776: ...Type set to Ph N At least two inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating the positive and negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph Ph Calculation of zero sequence requires GRPx_N input to be connected Negation setting inverts reverse the polarity of the analog input signal It is recommended that use of this setting is done with care mistake in setting may lead to mal...

Страница 777: ...hen no voltages are available note that the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference to VBase of the selected GBASVAL group This means that the minimum level for the current amplitude is based on VBase For example if VBase is 20000 the resulting minimum amplitude for current is 20000 10 2000 MinValFreqMeas The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated expressed as ...

Страница 778: ...GRP1_A GRP1_B GRP1_C GRP1_N SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN ANSI11000284 V1 EN Figure 356 Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference Assume instance SMAI_20_7 1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking For the SMAI_20_x task time groups Note that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type For task time...

Страница 779: ... sets of three phase analog signals of the same type for those IED functions that might need it 17 10 3 Function block 3PHSUM BLOCK REVROT G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC09000201_1_en vsd IEC09000201 V1 EN Figure 357 3PHSUM function block 17 10 4 Signals Table 599 3PHSUM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL G...

Страница 780: ...lBaseSel 1 6 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups SummationType Group1 Group2 Group1 Group2 Group2 Group1 Group1 Group2 Group1 Group2 Summation type DFTReference InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference Table 602 3PHSUM Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FreqMeasMinVal 5 200 1 10 Magnitude limit for frequency c...

Страница 781: ...onsistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating values when necessary Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter GlobalBaseSel defining one out of the six sets of GBASVAL functions 17 11 3 Settings Table 603 GBASVAL Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VBase 0 05 1000 00 kV 0 05 132 00 Global base voltage IBase 1 50000 A 1...

Страница 782: ...s points to the IED local through the local HMI remote through the communication ports The IED users can be created deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user management tool IEC12000202 1 en vsd IEC12000202 V1 EN Figure 358 PCM600 user management tool 17 12 3 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Section 17 1MRK 50...

Страница 783: ...in user names and passwords The maximum of characters in a password is 12 At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write users created in PCM600 to IED 17 12 4 1 Authorization handling in the IED At delivery the default user is the SuperUser No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management Once a user is crea...

Страница 784: ...n the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the bottom of the LCD If the Log on is OK when required to change for example a password protected setting the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder If the Log on has failed an Error Access Denied message opens If a user enters an incorrect password three times that user will be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to lo...

Страница 785: ...ible security mode when trying to negotiate with SSL The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features It tries to immediately activate implicit SSL if the specified port is 990 If the specified port is any other it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL TLS Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities This mode is only for accessing di...

Страница 786: ...licit SSL 17 15 Authority status ATHSTAT 17 15 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Authority status ATHSTAT 17 15 2 Functionality Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log on activity User denied attempt to log on and user successful log on are reported 17 15 3 Function block ATHS...

Страница 787: ...output USRBLKED the fact that at least one user is logged on the output LOGGEDON Whenever one of the two events occurs the corresponding output USRBLKED or LOGGEDON is activated 17 16 Denial of service 17 16 1 Functionality The Denial of service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic The communication facilities must not b...

Страница 788: ...RNT LINKUP WARNING ALARM IEC09000133 1 en vsd IEC09000133 V1 EN Figure 360 DOSFRNT function block 17 16 2 3 Signals Table 608 DOSFRNT Output signals Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state 17 16 2 4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the local...

Страница 789: ...orm INTEGER Number of non IP packets received in normal mode NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER Number of non IP packets received in polled mode NonIPPackDisc INTEGER Number of non IP packets discarded 17 16 3 Denial of service frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1 17 16 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Denial of servi...

Страница 790: ...percent 0 100 IPPackRecNorm INTEGER Number of IP packets received in normal mode IPPackRecPoll INTEGER Number of IP packets received in polled mode IPPackDisc INTEGER Number of IP packets discarded NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER Number of non IP packets received in normal mode NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER Number of non IP packets received in polled mode NonIPPackDisc INTEGER Number of non IP packets discard...

Страница 791: ...s the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication frame rate is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 17 Basic IED functions 785 Technical manual ...

Страница 792: ...786 ...

Страница 793: ...able The ground lead should be as short as possible less than 59 06 inches 1500 mm Additional length is required for door mounting ANSI11000286 V2 EN Figure 362 The protective ground pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 3U full 19 case 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 18 IED physical connections 787 Technical manual ...

Страница 794: ...2 9 10 100 220V 100 220V 100 220V 100 220V Table 613 Analog input modules AIM Terminal AIM 6I 4U AIM 4I 1I 5U X103 1 2 1 5A 1 5A X103 3 4 1 5A 1 5A X103 5 6 1 5A 1 5A X103 7 8 1 5A 1 5A X103 9 10 1 5A 0 1 0 5A X104 1 2 1 5A 100 220V X104 3 4 100 220V 100 220V X104 5 6 100 220V 100 220V X104 7 8 100 220V 100 220V X104 9 10 100 220V 100 220V See the connection diagrams for information on the analog ...

Страница 795: ...upply of 24 30 V DC Case Terminal Description 3U full 19 X420 3 Input X420 2 Input 18 2 3 Binary inputs Thebinaryinputs canbeused forexample togenerateablockingsignal tounlatchoutput contacts to trigger the digital fault recorder or for remote control of IED settings Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire Table 617 Binary inputs X304 3U full 19 Terminal Descriptio...

Страница 796: ...ble 618 Binary inputs X324 3U full 19 Terminal Description PCM600 info Hardware module instance Hardware channel X324 1 for input 1 BIO_3 BI1 X324 2 Binary input 1 BIO_3 BI1 X324 3 X324 4 Common for inputs 2 3 X324 5 Binary input 2 BIO_3 BI2 X324 6 Binary input 3 BIO_3 BI3 X324 7 X324 8 Common for inputs 4 5 X324 9 Binary input 4 BIO_3 BI4 X324 10 Binary input 5 BIO_3 BI5 X324 11 X324 12 Common fo...

Страница 797: ...put 6 BIO_4 BI6 X329 14 Binary input 7 BIO_4 BI7 X329 15 X329 16 Common for inputs 8 9 X329 17 Binary input 8 BIO_4 BI8 X329 18 Binary input 9 BIO_4 BI9 Table 620 Binary inputs X334 3U full 19 Terminal Description PCM600 info Hardware module instance Hardware channel X334 1 for input 1 BIO_5 BI1 X334 2 Binary input 1 BIO_5 BI1 X334 3 X334 4 Common for inputs 2 3 X334 5 Binary input 2 BIO_5 BI2 X33...

Страница 798: ... instance Hardware channel X339 1 for input 1 BIO_6 BI1 X339 2 Binary input 1 BIO_6 BI1 X339 3 X339 4 Common for inputs 2 3 X339 5 Binary input 2 BIO_6 BI2 X339 6 Binary input 3 BIO_6 BI3 X339 7 X339 8 Common for inputs 4 5 X339 9 Binary input 4 BIO_6 BI4 X339 10 Binary input 5 BIO_6 BI5 X339 11 X339 12 Common for inputs 6 7 X339 13 Binary input 6 BIO_6 BI6 X339 14 Binary input 7 BIO_6 BI7 X339 15...

Страница 799: ...vision TCSSCBR function will not operate properly Table 622 Output contacts X317 3U full 19 Terminal Description PCM600 info Hardware module instance Hardware channel Power output 1 normally open TCM X317 1 PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCM X317 2 Power output 2 normally open TCM X317 3 PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCM X317 4 Power output 3 normally open TCM X317 5 PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCM X317 6 X317 7 Power output 4 normally open...

Страница 800: ...ware module instance Hardware channel X326 1 Power output 1 normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO X326 2 X326 3 Power output 2 normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO X326 4 X326 5 Power output 3 normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO X326 6 Table 625 Output contacts X331 3U full 19 Terminal Description PCM600 info Hardware module instance Hardware channel X331 1 Power output 1 normally open BIO_5 BO1_PO X331 2 X331 3 Power output 2...

Страница 801: ...erminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire Table 627 Output contacts X317 3U full 19 Terminal Description PCM600 info Hardware module instance Hardware channel X317 13 Signal output 1 normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO X317 14 X317 15 Signal output 2 normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO X317 16 X317 17 Signal output 3 normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO X317 18 Table 628 Output contacts X321 3U full 19 Terminal...

Страница 802: ...O_4 BO5_SO X326 10 Signal output 2 X326 11 Signal output 3 normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO X326 12 Signal output 3 X326 13 Signal output 4 normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO X326 14 Signal output 5 normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO X326 15 Signal outputs 4 and 5 common X326 16 Signal output 6 normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO X326 17 Signal output 6 normally open X326 18 Signal output 6 common Table 630 Output contacts X3...

Страница 803: ...ignal output 3 normally open BIO_6 BO6_SO X336 12 Signal output 3 X337 13 Signal output 4 normally open BIO_6 BO7_SO X336 14 Signal output 5 normally open BIO_6 BO8_SO X336 15 Signal outputs 4 and 5 common X336 16 Signal output 6 normally closed BIO_6 BO9_SO X336 17 Signal output 6 normally open X336 18 Signal output 6 common 18 3 3 IRF The IRF contact functions as a change over output contact for...

Страница 804: ...ection 18 4 1 Ethernet RJ 45 front connection The IED s LHMI is provided with an RJ 45 connector designed for point to point use The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes The interface on the PC has to be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the DHCPServer is enabled in LHMI There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front interface only The eve...

Страница 805: ...Connection diagrams For four wire connections to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built in 120 ohm resistors connect X8 4 11 for Tx and X8 2 9 for Rx This can be set via the local HMI under Configuration Communication Station communication RS485 port RS485GEN 1 WireMode Four wire For two wire connections to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built in 120 ohm resistors connect X...

Страница 806: ...onnection diagrams The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of the product delivery The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from http www abb com substationautomation Connection diagrams for Customized products Connection diagram 650 series 1 3 1MRK006502 AD Connection diagrams for Configured products Connection diagram REL650 1 3 3...

Страница 807: ...5 220 250 V DC Vnvariation 80 120 of Vn 24 30 V DC 80 120 of Vn 38 4 150 V DC 85 110 of Vn 85 264 V AC 80 120 of Vn 88 300 V DC Maximum load of auxiliary voltage supply 35 W for DC 40 VA for AC Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15 of the DC value at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz Maximum interruption time in the auxiliary DC voltage without resetting the IED 50 ms at Vn Resolution of the voltage...

Страница 808: ...nuously Dynamic withstand 250 A one half wave 1250 A one half wave Burden 1 mVA at Ir 0 1 A 10 mVA at Ir 1 A 20 mVA at Ir 0 5 A 200 mVA at Ir 5 A max 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included Voltage inputs Rated voltage Vr 100 or 220 V Operating range 0 420 V Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s 420 V continuously Burden 50 mVA at 100 V 200 mVA at 220 V all values for individual voltage in...

Страница 809: ...250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 5 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 10 A Make and carry 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at V 48 110 220 V DC 0 5 A 0 1 A 0 04 A 19 6 Power outputs Table 639 Power output relays without TCM function Description Value Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 8 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and carry for 0 5 ...

Страница 810: ...AT 6 S FTP or better 100 MBits s 100BASE FX TCP IP protocol Fibre optic cable with LC connector 100 MBits s Table 642 Fibre optic communication link Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1 Distance 1300 nm MM 62 5 125 μm glass fibre core LC 8 dB 2 km 1 Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together Table 643 X8 IRIG B and EIA 485 interface Type Protocol Ca...

Страница 811: ...ax cable length 925 m 3000 ft Cable AWG24 or better stub lines shall be avoided Table 646 Serial rear interface Type Counter connector Serial port X9 Optical serial port type ST for IEC 60870 5 103 and DNP serial Table 647 Optical serial port X9 Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1 820 nm MM 62 5 125 µm glass fibre core ST 6 8 dB approx 1700m length with 4 db km fibre atten...

Страница 812: ...ve humidity 93 non condensing Atmospheric pressure 12 47 15 37 psi 86 106 kPa Altitude up to 6561 66 feet 2000 m Transport and storage temperature range 40 85ºC Table 650 Environmental tests Description Type test value Reference Cold tests operation storage 96 h at 25ºC 16 h at 40ºC 96 h at 40ºC IEC 60068 2 1 ANSI C37 90 2005 chapter 4 Dry heat tests operation storage 16 h at 70ºC 96 h at 85ºC IEC...

Страница 813: ...nterference tests Conducted common mode 10 V emf f 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 level 3 IEC 60255 22 6 Radiated amplitude modulated 20 V m rms f 80 1000 MHz and f 1 4 2 7 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 level 3 IEC 60255 22 3 ANSI C37 90 2 2004 Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000 4 4 IEC 60255 22 4 class A ANSI C37 90 1 2012 Communication ports 4 kV Other ports 4 kV Surge immunity test IEC 61000 4 5 IEC ...

Страница 814: ... ms No restart 0 s Correct behaviour at power down IEC 60255 11 IEC 61000 4 11 Voltage dips and interruptions on AC power supply Dips 40 10 12 cycles at 50 60 Hz 70 25 30 cycles at 50 60 Hz Interruptions 0 50 ms No restart 0 s Correct behaviour at power down IEC 60255 11 IEC 61000 4 11 Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011 class A IEC 60255 25 ANSI C63 4 FCC Conducted RF emission mains terminal ...

Страница 815: ...90 2005 Test voltage 5 kV unipolar impulses waveform 1 2 50 μs source energy 0 5 J 1 kV unipolar impulses waveform 1 2 50 μs source energy 0 5 J communication Insulation resistance measurements IEC 60255 5 ANSI C37 90 2005 Isolation resistance 100 MΏ 500 V DC Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255 27 Resistance 0 1 Ώ 60 s 20 3 Mechanical tests Table 653 Mechanical tests Description Reference Requ...

Страница 816: ...3 Class 2 20 4 Product safety Table 654 Product safety Description Reference LV directive 2006 95 EC Standard EN 60255 27 2005 20 5 EMC compliance Table 655 EMC compliance Description Reference EMC directive 2004 108 EC Standard EN 50263 2000 EN 60255 26 2007 Section 20 1MRK 506 335 UUS A IED and functionality tests 810 Technical manual ...

Страница 817: ...tions current dependent time characteristics are used Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series xx05000129_ansi vsd IPickup IPickup IPickup ANSI05000129 V1 EN Figure 363 Three overcurrent protections connected in series en05000130 vsd Time Fault point position Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 IEC05000130 V1 EN Figure 3...

Страница 818: ... must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections This required time margin is dependent of following factors in a simple case with two protections in series Difference between pick up time of the protections to be co ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections As...

Страница 819: ... will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted The breaker time t2 t1 can differ between different faults The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active At time t3 the protection A1 is reset i e the ti...

Страница 820: ...dard curves are available If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value a timer according to the selected operating mode is started The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations In case of definite time lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until the current drops below the reset...

Страница 821: ...l protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip D æ ö æ ö ç ç ç è ø è ø å 1 P n j i j t C A td Pickupn EQUATION1644 V1 EN Equation 118 where j 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected that is when 1 i Pickupn EQUATION1646 V1 EN Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm n is the number of the execution of the ...

Страница 822: ...of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics there are also two additional inverse curves available the RI curve and the RD curve The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteri...

Страница 823: ...5 8 1 35 ln i t td Pickupn s EQUATION1648 V1 EN Equation 121 where Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n td is set time multiplier for step n and i is the measured current The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis 21 3 Inverse time characteristics When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected the operate time o...

Страница 824: ... 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 ANSI Long Time Inverse A 0 086 B 0 185 P 0 02 Table 657 IEC Inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø 1 P A t td I EQUATION1653 V1 EN I Imeasured Iset td 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 IEC Normal Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Very inverse A 13 5 P 1 0 IEC Inverse A 0 14 P 0 02 IEC Extremely inverse A 80 0 P 2 0 IEC Short time invers...

Страница 825: ... of 0 01 Table 659 Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve æ ö ç è ø t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1661 V1 EN V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 5 60 ms Type B curve æ ö ç è ø 2 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1662 V1 EN td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve æ ö ç è ø 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VP...

Страница 826: ...0 01 Table 661 Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve æ ö ç è ø t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1661 V1 EN V Vmeasured td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 5 70 ms Type B curve æ ö ç è ø 2 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPickup VPickup EQUATION1662 V1 EN td 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve æ ö ç è ø 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t td V VPick...

Страница 827: ...A070750 V2 EN Figure 368 ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 821 Technical manual ...

Страница 828: ...A070751 V2 EN Figure 369 ANSI Very inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 822 Technical manual ...

Страница 829: ...A070752 V2 EN Figure 370 ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 823 Technical manual ...

Страница 830: ...A070753 V2 EN Figure 371 ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 824 Technical manual ...

Страница 831: ...A070817 V2 EN Figure 372 ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 825 Technical manual ...

Страница 832: ...A070818 V2 EN Figure 373 ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 826 Technical manual ...

Страница 833: ...A070819 V2 EN Figure 374 ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 827 Technical manual ...

Страница 834: ...A070820 V2 EN Figure 375 IEC Normal inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 828 Technical manual ...

Страница 835: ...A070821 V2 EN Figure 376 IEC Very inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 829 Technical manual ...

Страница 836: ...A070822 V2 EN Figure 377 IEC Inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 830 Technical manual ...

Страница 837: ...A070823 V2 EN Figure 378 IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 831 Technical manual ...

Страница 838: ...A070824 V2 EN Figure 379 IEC Short time inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 832 Technical manual ...

Страница 839: ...A070825 V2 EN Figure 380 IEC Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 833 Technical manual ...

Страница 840: ...A070826 V2 EN Figure 381 RI type inverse time characteristics Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 834 Technical manual ...

Страница 841: ...A070827 V2 EN Figure 382 RD type inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 835 Technical manual ...

Страница 842: ...GUID ACF4044C 052E 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN Figure 383 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 836 Technical manual ...

Страница 843: ...GUID F5E0E1C2 48C8 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 V1 EN Figure 384 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 837 Technical manual ...

Страница 844: ...GUID A9898DB7 90A3 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 V1 EN Figure 385 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 838 Technical manual ...

Страница 845: ...GUID 35F40C3B B483 40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC V1 EN Figure 386 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Section 21 Time inverse characteristics 839 Technical manual ...

Страница 846: ...GUID B55D0F5F 9265 4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN Figure 387 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 21 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Time inverse characteristics 840 Technical manual ...

Страница 847: ...otection BFOC 2 5 Bayonet fibre optic connector BFP Breaker failure protection BI Binary input BOS Binary outputs status BR External bistable relay BS British Standards CB Circuit breaker CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Class...

Страница 848: ... Projects Agency The US developer of the TCP IP protocol etc DBDL Dead bus dead line DBLL Dead bus live line DC Direct current DFC Data flow control DFT Discrete Fourier transform DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DI Digital input DLLB Dead line live bus DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815 2012 DR Disturbance recorder DRAM Dynamic random access memory DRH Disturbance repor...

Страница 849: ...munication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600 GI General interrogation command GIS Gas insulated switchgear GOOSE Generic object oriented substation event GPS Global positioning system GSAL Generic security application GSE Generic substation event HDLC protocol High level data link control protocol based on the HDLC standard HFBR connect...

Страница 850: ...e referred to as instances of that function One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function IP 1 Internet protocol The network layer fo...

Страница 851: ... A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition For example a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point that is the set reach The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it PCI Peripheral component interconnect a local data bus PCM600 Protection and cont...

Страница 852: ...cording to standard IEC 61850 SDU Service data unit SMA connector Subminiature version A A threaded connector with constant impedance SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600 SMS Station monitoring system SNTP Simplenetworktimeprotocol isusedto synchronize computer clocks on local area networks This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network Each emb...

Страница 853: ...This module transforms currents and voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further signal processing TYP Type identification UMT User management tool Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition For example a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the ba...

Страница 854: ... in the phonetic alphabet stands for Z which stands for longitude zero UV Undervoltage WEI Weak end infeed logic VT Voltage transformer 3IO Three times zero sequence current Often referred to as the residual or the ground fault current 3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage Section 22 1MRK 506 335 UUS A Glossary 848 Technica...

Страница 855: ...849 ...

Страница 856: ...ice ABB AB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack of information in this document We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations contained herein Any reproduction disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in whole or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB Copyright 2013 ABB All r...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для REL650 series

Бренд: Magnavox Страницы: 2

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 26

Бренд: Black Box Страницы: 4

Бренд: Samlex Europe Страницы: 19

Бренд: Datalogic Страницы: 10

Бренд: fengMi Страницы: 7

HLS5686WX - 56" Rear Projection TV

Бренд: Samsung Страницы: 131

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 28

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 22

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 48

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 60

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 48

Бренд: Philips Страницы: 199

Бренд: Eaton Страницы: 8

FEBCO 850 Series

Бренд: Watts Страницы: 2

Бренд: Richards Страницы: 53

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды